Home
- OpenMX website
Contents
1. 1 arge_example 5_5_13COb2 dat Elapsed time s 39 43 diff Utot 0 000000000013 diff Force 0 000000000046 2 arge_example B2C62_Band dat Elapsed time s 572 22 diff Utot 0 000000000025 diff Force 0 000000013928 3 arge_example CG15c Kry dat Elapsed time s 40 71 diff Utot 0 000000002112 diff Force 0 000000001090 4 large_ example DIA512 1 dat Elapsed time s 37 93 diff Utot 0 000000169524 diff Force 0 000000033761 5 arge_example FeBCC dat Elapsed time s 81 55 diff Utot 0 000000000649 diff Force 0 000000001349 6 arge_ example GEL dat Elapsed time s 47 05 diff Utot 0 000000000066 diff Force 0 000000000002 7 large example GFRAG dat Elapsed time s 24 05 diff Utot 0 000000000122 diff Force 0 000000000015 8 arge_example GGFF dat Elapsed time s 639 31 diff Utot 0 000000000051 diff Force 0 000000000243 9 arge_example MCCN dat Elapsed time s 53 72 diff Utot 0 000000009994 diff Force 0 000000016474 10 arge_example Mn12_148_F dat Elapsed time s 76 58 diff Utot 0 000000000096 diff Force 0 000000000090 11 arge_example N1C999 dat Elapsed time s 97 56 diff Utot 0 000000006902 diff Force 0 000000007356 12 arge_example Ni63 064 dat Elapsed time s 78 00 diff Utot 0 000000000782 diff Force 0 000000000047 13 arge_example Pt63 dat Elapsed time s 60 40 diff Utot 0 000000002147 diff Force 0 000000000059 14 large_example SialicAcid dat Elapsed time s 47 80 diff Utot 0 000000000005 diff Force 0 000000000003 15 arg
2. L b 2 sol b Elapsed Cluster a Ideal S 40 y jo 0 a amp 20 20 40 60 140 T T T T T T J 120 C and e Elapsed J 100 7 ldeal Speed up ratio o o Number of processors Figure 19 Speed up ratio of the elapsed time per MD step in parallel calculations using MPI on a CRAY XC30 2 6 GHz Xeon processors a for the carbon diamond including 512 atoms in the supercell by the DC method b for a single molecular magnet consisting of 148 atoms by the cluster method and c for the carbon diamond including 64 atoms in the super cell by the band method with 3x3x3 k points For comparison a line which corresponds to the ideal speed up ratio is also shown the density matrix after finding the Fermi level In Fig 19 c we see a good speed up ratio as a function of processes in the elapsed time for a spin unpolarized calculation of carbon diamond consisting of 64 carbon atoms with 3x3x3 k points The input file DIA64_Band dat is found in the directory work In this case the spin multiplicity is one and the number of k points used for the actual calculation is 3 3 3 1 2 1 14 since the k points in the half Brillouin zone is taken into account for the collinear calculation and the point is included when all the numbers of k points for a b and c axes are odd So it is found that the speed up ratio exceeds the ideal one in the range of processes over 14 which mean
3. 34 Band dispersion Band dispersion When you evaluate the band dispersion please specify ON for the keyword Band dispersion Band K Path UnitCell The keyword Band KPath UnitCell gives unit vectors which are used in the calculation of the band dispersion as follows lt Band KPath UnitCell 3 56 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 56 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 56 Band KPath UnitCell gt The beginning of the description must be lt Band KPath UnitCell and the last of the description must be Band KPath UnitCell gt If Band KPath UnitCell exists the reciprocal lattice vectors for the calculation of the band dispersion are calculated by the unit vectors specified in Band KPath UnitCell If Band KPath UnitCell is not found the reciprocal lattice vectors which are calculated by the unit vectors specified in Atoms Unit Vectors is employed for the calculation of the band dispersion In case of fcc bec base centered cubic and trigonal cells the reciprocal lattice vectors for the calculation of the band dispersion should be specified using the keyword Band KPath UnitCell based on the consuetude in the band calculations Band Nkpath The keyword Band Nkpath gives the number of paths for the band dispersion Band kpath The keyword Band kpath specifies the paths of the band dispersion as follows lt Band kpath 15 0 00 0 0 0 1 00 00 0 gX 15 1 00 00 0 1 00 50 0 XW 15 1 0 0 50 0 0 50 50 5 WL 1
4. gt SPRD gt SPRD Angs 2 gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD Omega I is the gauge invariant part of spread function Omega D and Omega OD are the gauge dependent diagonal and off diagonal contribution respectively Tot_Omega is the sum up of all the above three components of the spread function CENT Monitor the variation of Wannier function center grep WF WF WF WF WF WF WF WF ON OOF WD BE CENT 1 MAA OA OA OA O OOF Be stdout 14164289 1 55716251 0 1 1 55716191 1 1 0 14164389 20775982 20776045 0 20775851 0 20775787 0 std 14164298 55716342 14164295 55716087 20775967 20775959 20775981 0 20775767 0 0 1 14164266 1 14164203 1 1 0 55716190 55716055 20775893 20775914 20775888 20775933 NNNNNNN ND Total Center 5 39761509 5 39761243 5 39760738 SD 147 95573380 gt CEN 95572597 gt CEN 95572978 gt CEN 95572957 gt CEN 95572677 gt CEN 95572605 gt CEN 95572925 gt CEN 95573335 gt CEN AHA HA HHH T sum_spread 23 64583455 gt CENT WF 1 1 14164582 1 14164592 1 14164559 2 95566613 gt CENT WF 2 1 55715957 1 55716049 1 14164497 2 95565831 gt CENT WF 3 1 55715897 1 14164588 1 55715897 2 95566211 gt CENT WF 4
5. Orbital optimization of a methane molecule opt of a a multiply connected carbon nanotube opt of a distorted methane molecule of a methane molecule SCF calc of a single molecular magnet Mn12 Non collinear SCF calc of a MnO molecule SCF calc of a nitro benzene molecule under E field SCF calc of a Pt13 cluster SCF calc of a Pt63 cluster SCF calc of a sialic acid molecule DC calc of valorphin molecule NEB calc of C2H4 dimer Low order scaling calc of a C60 molecule SCF calc of bulk diamond Non collinear SCF calc of bulk MnO Non collinear SCF calc of bulk FeO Non collinear SCF calc of bulk CoO Non collinear SCF calc of bulk NiO SCF calc of bulk NiO SCF calc of bulk diamond including 64 atoms DC calc of bulk diamond including 8 atoms DC calc of bulk diamond including 64 atoms DC calc of bulk diamond including 216 atoms DC calc of bulk diamond including 512 atoms Krylov O N calc of bulk diamond including 512 atoms SCF calc of bcc Fe Non collinear calc of bulk gallium arsenide SCF calc of bulk NaCl 184 57 NaC1_FC dat SCF calc of bulk NaCl with a Cl site vacancy si8 dat Geometry opt of distorted Si bulk A1 Si111_ESM dat ESM calc of Al Si interface Cafcc_FS dat Fermi surface calc of the fcc Ca bulk Graphite_STM dat STM image of graphene Mnfcc EvsLC dat E vs lattice constant calc of the fcc Mn bulk Si8_NEB dat NEB calc for hydrogen in Si Known problems Overcompleteness of
6. SpeciesAndCoordinates 77755846408657 1 C 2 Cc 3 H 4 H 5 H 6 H 7 C 8 C 9 H 10 H 11 H 12 H Keywords for the NEB calculation 0 0 77681707294741 1 23451821718817 1 23451823170776 23506432458023 23506425800395 77755854665393 0 77681705017323 1 23451826851556 1 23451821324627 1 1 23506431230451 23506433587007 NEB Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt 00000000101783 00000000316062 92942544650857 92942544733979 92944748269232 92944749402510 00000000341499 00000000006073 92942539308841 92942539212392 92944744948986 92944744880542 00000003553856 00000002413166 88763832172374 88763828275851 88767426830774 88767424658723 00000000908006 00000000970885 88763828740000 88763830875131 88767430754577 88767428525317 19961193219289 19961215251205 19953308980064 19953308820323 19953309891389 19953309747076 19961191775648 19961215383949 19953308889301 19953308816332 19953310195071 19953310162389 input file by 77730141035137 77729608216595 23464057728123 23464059022330 23470899088096 23470896874564 77730136931056 77729611199476 23464060936812 23464061208483 23470894717613 23470902573029 The NEB calculation can be performed by setting the keyword MD Type as 160 O OO ONN OOO ON NY annnoeoenwTa9noaoao O OO ONN OOO ON N annan eoonrndnan4aoao DOOONN ODO OO ON N DOOON
7. T Ozaki Phys Rev B 75 035123 2007 M Brandbyge J L Mozos P Ordejon J Taylor and K Stokbro Phys Rev B 65 165401 2002 G C Liang A W Ghosh M Paulsson and S Datta Phys Rev B 69 115302 2004 H Weng T Ozaki and K Terakura Phys Rev B 79 235118 2009 http www gnu org http www cscs ch molekel http www xcrysden org T Lis Acta Crystallogra B 36 2042 1980 T P Davis T J Gillespie F Porreca Peptides 10 747 1989 A Goldstein S Tachibana L I Lowney M Hunkapiller and L Hood Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A 76 6666 1979 U C Singh and P A Kollman J Comp Chem 5 129 1984 191 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 TT 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 L E Chirlian and M M Francl J Com Chem 8 894 1987 B H Besler K M Merz Jr and P A Kollman J Comp Chem 11 431 1990 http www webelements com M Cardona N E Christensen and G Gasol Phys Rev B 38 1806 1988 G Theurich and N A Hill Phys Rev B 64 073106 2001 Physics of Group IV Elements and III V Compounds edited by O Madelung M Schulz and H Weiss Landolt Biiornstein New Series Group 3 Vol 17 Pt a Springer Berlin 1982 T Ono and K Hirose Phys Rev B 72 085105 2005 W N Mei L L Boyer M J Mehl M M Ossowski and H T Stokes Phys Rev B 61
8. and output the result to a file output cube then perform the executable file as follows diff_gcube input1 cube input2 cube output cube The difference is output to output cube in the Gaussian cube format Thus you can easily visualize the difference using many software such XCrySDen 61 and Molekel 60 In fact Fig 22 in the Section Electric field was made by this procedure 172 48 Analysis of difference in two geometrical structures A utility tool is provided to analyze the difference between two geometrical coordinates in two xyz files which store Cartesian coordinates The following three analyses are supported a root mean square of deviation RMSD between two Cartesian coordinates defined by Natom Porn 0 2 RMSD y D a Natom a mean deviation MD between two Cartesian coordinates defined by Na om gt i Ri Rol atom MD and a mean deviation between bond lengths MDBL defined by Y bond BL BL Nbona MDBL where Natom and Npona are the number of atoms and the number of bonds with bond length BL within a cutoff radius Also the deviation vector between xyz coordinate of each atom is output to a xsf file dgeo_vec xsf in the XCrySDen format If you analyze the difference between two geometries this tool would be useful 1 Compiling of diff_gcube c There is a file diff_ gcube c in the directory source Compile the file as follows gcc diff_geo
9. but the x coordinate of the carbon atom of the methane molecule is moved to 0 3 as follows lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 0 300000 0 000000 0 000000 2 0 2 0 2 H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 3 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 4 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 5 H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt Then a keyword MD type is specified as Opt and set to 200 for a keyword MD maxlIter The Opt is based on a simple steepest decent method with a variable prefactor Figure 8 a shows the convergence history of the norm of the maximum force on atom as a function of the number of the optimization steps We see that the norm of the maximum force on atom converges after the structure overshot the stationary point because of change of the prefactor Using Methane2 dat in the directory work you can trace the calculation As well as the case of the methane molecule a similar behavior can be seen for the silicon diamond as shown in Fig 8 b Bulk Si Opt 107 p _ 9 A Norm of Maximum Force Hartree Bohr 0 5 10 15 20 235 0 5 10 15 20 25 Number of Geomergy Optimization Steps Figure 8 The norm of the maximum force on atom of a a methane molecule b silicon in the diamond structure as a function of geometry optimization steps The initial structures are ones distorted from the the equilibrium structures The input
10. in the standard output which gives x y and z components of the origin of the regular grid as Grid_Origin xxx yyy zzz Then in order to keep the relative position you have to include the following keyword scf fixed grid in your input file for all the systems in the calculations required for the evaluation of the interaction energy scf fixed grid xxx yyy zzz where xxx yyy zzz is the coordinate of the origin you got in the calculation for one of the structures The procedure largely suppresses the numerical error involved in the use of the regular grid In addition as discussed in the previous subsection A tip for calculating the energy curve for bulks the number of grids should be fixed by the keyword scf Ngrid when the lattice parameters are also changed in the evaluation of interaction energy ol 12 SCF convergence 12 1 General Five charge mixing schemes in OpenMX Ver 3 7 are available by the keyword scf Mixing Type e Simple mixing Simple Relevant keywords scf Init Mixing Weight scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight Residual minimization method in the direct inversion iterative subspace RMM DIIS 40 Relevant keywords scf Init Mixing Weight scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight scf Mixing History scf Mixing StartPulay Guaranteed reduction Pulay method GR Pulay 39 Relevant keywords scf Init Mixing Weight scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight
11. is modified as the original system name_ So one can check the SCF convergence by monitoring a file system name DFTSCF whether it converges or not 42 7 Parallel calculation In the NEB calculation the setting for the parallelization will be automatically done depending on the number of processes and threads However it would be better to provide a proper number of processes for the MPI parallelization which can be divisible by the number of images given by MD NEB Number Images in order to achieve a good load balance in the MPI parallelization It is noted that the number of processes for the MPI parallelization can exceed the number of atoms unlike the conventional calculation The hybrid parallelization by OpenMP MPYI is also supported Although the default parallelization scheme works well in most cases a memory shortage can be a serious problem when a small number of the MPI processes is used for large scale systems In the default MPI parallelization the images are preferentially parallelized at first When the number of MPI processes exceeds the number of images the calculation of each image starts to be parallelized where the memory usage starts to be parallelized as well In this case users may encounter a segmentation fault due to the memory shortage if many CPU cores are not available To avoid such a situation the following keyword is available MD NEB Parallel Number 3 In this example the calculations of every thr
12. is small numerical instabilities appear often e Use a large value for scf Mixing History In most cases scf Mixing History 20 can be a good value Among these mixing schemes the robustest one might be RMM DIISK scf Init Mixing Weight The keyword scf Init Mixing Weight gives the initial mixing weight used by the simple mixing the GR Pulay the RMM DIIS the Kerker and the RMM DIISK methods The valid range is 0 lt scf Init Mixing Weight lt 1 The default is 0 3 scf Min Mixing Weight The keyword scf Min Mixing Weight gives the lower limit of a mixing weight in the simple and Kerker mixing methods The default is 0 001 scf Max Mixing Weight The keyword scf Max Mixing Weight gives the upper limit of a mixing weight in the simple and Kerker mixing methods The default is 0 4 28 scf Kerker factor The keyword gives a Kerker factor which is used in the Kerker and RMM DIISK mixing methods If the keyword is not given a proper value is automatically determined For further details see the Section SCF convergence scf Mixing History In the GR Pulay method 39 the RMM DIIS method 40 the Kerker method 41 and the RMM DIISK method 40 the input electron density at the next SCF step is estimated based on the output electron densities in the several previous SCF steps The keyword scf Mixing History specifies the number of previous SCF steps which are used in the estimatio
13. scf Mixing History scf Mixing StartPulay e Kerker mixing Kerker 41 Relevant keywords scf Init Mixing Weight scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight scf Kerker factor e RMM DIIS with Kerker metric RMM DIISK 40 Relevant keywords scf Init Mixing Weight scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight scf Mixing History scf Mixing StartPulay scf Mixing EveryPulay scf Kerker factor In the first three schemes density matrices which are regarded as a quantity in real space are mixed to generate the input density matrix which can be easily converted into spin charge density On the other hand the charge mixing is made in Fourier space in the last two schemes Generally it is easier to achieve SCF convergence in large gap systems using any mixing scheme However it would be difficult to achieve a sufficient SCF convergence in smaller gap and metallic systems since a charge sloshing problem in the SCF calculations becomes serious often To handle such difficult systems two mixing schemes are currently available Kerker and RMM DIISK methods The two mixing schemes could be an effective way for achieving the SCF convergence of metallic systems When Kerker or RMM DIISK is used the following prescriptions are helpful to obtain the convergence of SCF calculations e Increase of scf Mixing History A relatively larger vaule 30 50 may lead to the convergence In addition scf Mixing EveryPulay shoul
14. x coordinate y coordinate z coordinate initial occupation for up spin initial occupation for down spin Euler angle theta of the magnetic field for spin magnetic moment Euler angle phi of the magnetic field for spin magnetic moment Also the 8th and 9th are used to generate the initial non collinear spin charge distribution the Euler angle theta of the magnetic field for orbital magnetic moment the Euler angle phi of the magnetic field for orbital magnetic moment switch for the constraint schemes specified by the keywords scf Constraint NC Spin scf NC Zeeman Orbital and scf NC Zeeman Orbital 1 means that the constraint is applied and 0 no constraint switch for enhancement of orbital polarization in the LDA U method on means that the enhancement is made off no enhancement The initial Euler angles 9 and for orientation of the spin and orbital magnetic moment are given by the 8th and 9th columns and 10th and 11th columns respectively The 12th column is a switch for a constraint scheme that a constraint penalty or Zeeman functional to the spin and orbital orientation is added on each site where 1 means that the constraint functional is added and 0 means no constraint For the details of the constraint DFT for the spin orientation see the Section Constraint DFT for non collinear spin orientation The final 13th column is a switch for enhancement of orbital
15. 1 0 Bain Aq with E 1 2 2 2 Aq 3 bil b2 ba 1 Dg 5 gt bi bjf i lt j where b i 1 2 3 is a reciprocal vector and bin is the smallest vector among b The equation takes account of the dependency of on the size and anisotropy of the system From a series of numerical calculations it is found that the estimated value works well in most cases 12 3 On the fly control of SCF mixing parameters During the SCF calculation it is possible to change the following parameters for the SCF mixing 54 scf maxIter scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight scf Kerker factor scf Mixing StartPulay For example when you specify the following two keywords in your input file as System CurrrentDirectory System Name default c60 then make a file whose name is c60_SCF keywords in the directory and write in it as scf maxIter scf Min Mixing Weight scf Max Mixing Weight scf Kerker factor scf Mixing StartPulay 100 0 01 0 10 10 0 30 OpenMX will try to read the file c60_SCF_ keywords at every SCF step and show the following message in the standard output if the file is successfully read by OpenMX The keywords for SCF iteration are renewed by c60_SCF_keywords Also if a minus value is given for the keyword scf maxlter then OpenMX will be terminated The on the fly control of SCF mixing parameters may be useful when large scale calculations ar
16. ACT JST 94 NAREGI 95 CREST JST 96 and MEXT 97 References 10 11 12 13 P Hohenberg and W Kohn Phys Rev 136 B864 1964 W Kohn and L J Sham Phys Rev 140 A1133 1965 D M Ceperley and B J Alder Phys Rev Lett 45 566 1980 J P Perdew and A Zunger Phys Rev B 23 5048 1981 J P Perdew and A Zunger Phys Rev B 23 5048 1981 J P Perdew and Y Wang Phys Rev B 45 13244 1992 J P Perdew K Burke and M Ernzerhof Phys Rev Lett 77 3865 1996 U Von Barth and L Hedin J Phys C Solid State Phys 5 1629 1972 J K bler K H Hock J Sticht and A R Williams J Phys F Met Phys 18 469 1988 J Sticht K H Hock and J K bler J Phys Condens Matter 1 8155 1989 T Oda A Pasquarello and R Car Phys Rev Lett 80 3622 1998 A H MacDonald and S H Vosko J Phys C Solid State Phys 12 2977 1979 Ph Kurz F Forster L Nordstrom G Bihlmayer and S Blugel Phys Rev B 69 024415 2004 R D King Smith and D Vanderbilt Phys Rev B 47 1651 1993 G Theurich and N A Hill Phys Rev B 64 073106 2001 189 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 A I Liechtenstein M I Katsnelson V P Antropov and V A Gubanov J Mag Mag Mat 67 65 1987 M J Han T Ozaki and J Yu Phys R
17. HS fileout If you want to use Kohn Sham Hamiltonian overlap and density matrices please set in HS fileout ON y y Then these data are stored to scfout in a binary form where is the file name specified by the keyword System Name The utilization of these data is illustrated in the Section Interface for de velopers Voronoi charge Voronoi charge If you want to calculate Voronoi charges then set the keyword Voronoi charge in ON The result is found in out is the file name specified by the keyword System Name 37 7 Output files In case of level of fileout 0 the following files are generated In the following is the file name specified by the keyword System Name out The history of SCF calculations the history of geometry optimization Mulliken charges the total energy and the dipole moment xyz The final geometrical structure obtained by MD or the geometry optimization which can be read in xmakemol and XCrySDen bulk xyz If scf EigenvalueSolver Band atomic coordinates including atoms in copied cells are output which can be read in xmakemol and XCrySDen rst The directory storing restart files md Geometrical coordinates at every MD step which can be read in xmakemol and XCrySDen md2 Geometrical coordinates at the final MD step with the species names that you specified cif Initial geo
18. Hartree 1 0 37794520 0 12552253 0 04583483 0 49511548 223 77375997 2 0 37794520 0 08735938 0 03172307 0 35373414 223 85373393 3 0 37794520 0 05559291 0 01919790 0 25650527 223 89469352 4 0 37794520 0 03970051 0 01254863 0 20236344 223 91689564 5 0 45353424 0 03132536 0 01360864 0 17275416 223 93128189 6 0 45353424 0 02661456 0 01202789 0 15142709 223 94412534 7 0 45353424 0 02367627 0 01068250 0 13703973 223 95422398 Also c2h4 neb ene and c2h4 neb xyz can be used to analyze the change of total energy as a function of the distance Bohr from the precursor and the structural change as shown in Fig 39 b The content of c2h4 neb ene is as follows ist column index of images where O and MD NEB Number Images 1 are the terminals 2nd column Total energy Hartree of each image 3rd column distance Bohr between neighbors 4th column distance Bohr from the image of the index 0 0 28 02131967 0 00000000 0 00000000 1 28 02125585 0 82026029 0 82026029 2 28 02086757 0 82124457 1 64150486 3 28 01974890 0 82247307 2 46397794 4 28 01724274 0 82231749 3 28629543 5 28 01205847 0 82220545 4 10850088 6 27 98707448 0 82271212 4 93121300 162 a 27 86 a z D y 10 a f WE b 27 91 E J 5 N J 0 J y 3 27 94 3 10 E 8 3 27 98 1 ir z LU E 10 28 02 z 18 l E a z 3 28 06 7 4 10 E 28 1 4 1 A ji 1 1 r 1 1 Optimizat
19. It is found that the eigenvalues energy converges by 11 iterations within 1 0e 10 Hartree FEA 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K 2K 2k CCC 3K 3K A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K K K K K K K K 2 2 2 2 3K 2K 2K FRA AIRE CICA A A A A 3K 3K K K K K 21 21 24 21 25 21 25 21 2 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 3K 2K 2K SCF history at MD 1 FEA ak 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K 2K 2K 2k 2k CCC ACI A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K 24 K gt K K K K K 2 2 2 2 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K ARO FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K 2 K K FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K FK 2K OK ok ok SCF 1 NormRD 1 000000000000 Uele 3 523143659974 SCF 2 NormRD 0 567253699744 Uele 4 405605131921 SCF 3 NormRD 0 103433490729 Uele 3 982266241934 SCF 4 NormRD 0 024234990593 Uele 3 906896836134 14 SCF 5 NormRD 0 011006215697 Uele 3 893084558820 SCF 6 NormRD 0 006494145332 Uele 3 890357113476 SCF 7 NormRD 0 002722267527 Uele 3 891669816209 SCF 8 NormRD 0 000000672350 Uele 3 889285164733 SCF 9 NormRD 0 000000402419 Uele 3 889285102456 SCF 10 NormRD 0 000000346348 Uele 3 889285101128 SCF 11 NormRD 0 000000515395 Uele 3 889285101063 Also the total energy chemical potential Kohn Sham eigenvalues the Mulliken charges dipole mo ment forces fractional coordinate and analysis of computational time are output in met out as follows AO RR Rd Rd dl RR FK FK FK dd al dal FK K K K K K K FK ol ok ak ok OK Total energy Hart
20. NEGF Dos energyrange 15 0 25 0 5 0e 3 default 10 0 10 0 5 0e 3 eV NEGF Dos energy div 200 default 200 NEGF Dos Kgrid 11 default 1 1 When you want to calculate DOS the keyword Dos fileout should be set to on as usual Also the energy range where DOS is calculated is given by the keyword NEGF Dos energyrange where the first and second numbers correspond to the lower and upper bounds and the third number is an imaginary number used for smearing out DOS The energy range specified by NEGF Dos energyrange is divided by the number specified by the keyword NEGF Dos energy div The numbers of k points to discretize the reciprocal vectors b and are specified by the keyword NEGF Dos Kgrid The set of numbers given by NEGF Dos Kgrid tends to be larger than that by NEGF scf Kgrid because of computational efficiency After the NEGF calculation with these parameters you will find two files Dos val and Dos vec and can analyze those by the same procedure as usual Also it should be noted that the origin of energy is set to the chemical potential of the left lead 38 4 Step 3 The transmission and current After the calculations of the steps 2 and 3 you can proceed calculations of transmission and current by adding the following keywords to the input file used in the calculation of the step 2 NEGF tran energyrange 10 10 1 0e 3 default 10 0 10 0 1 0e 3 eV NEGF tran energydiv 200
21. default 200 NEGF tran Kgrid 11 default 1 1 The energy range where the transmission is calculated is given by the keyword NEGF tran energyrange where the first and second numbers correspond to the lower and upper bounds and the third num ber is an imaginary number used for smearing out the transmission The energy range specified by NEGF tran energyrange is divided by the number specified by the keyword NEGF tran energydiv The numbers of k points to discretize the reciprocal vectors b and are specified by the keyword NEGF tran Kgrid The set of numbers given by NEGF tran Kgrid can be different and tends to be larger than that by NEGF scf Kgrid because of computational efficiency The calculations of the transmission and current are performed by a program code TranMain which can be compiled in the directory source as follows make TranMain If the compilation is successful you will find the executable file IranMain and may copy it your work directory possibly work Using the code TranMain you can perform the calculation of the step 3 for example as follows 131 TranMain NEGF Chain dat SOOO OO kkk kkk kk kk kk kk kk 2k FOO OO E E E E E k kkk kkk kk kk kk kk kkk Welcome to TranMain This is a post processing code of OpenMX to calculate electronic transmission and current Copyright C 2002 2013 H Kino and T Ozaki TranMain comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY Thi
22. for carbon atom in the database Ver 2013 valence electron 4 0000 The number 4 0 corresponds to the number of electrons which is taken into account in the pseudopo tential generation So we see in the above example that the sum of up 2 0 and down 2 0 spins charges is 4 0 for C in the specification of Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates When you make pseudopotentials using ADPACK by yourself you should pay attention to the following points AT e Check whether unphysical calculations have been caused by the ghost states or not Because of the use of the separable form the ghost states often appear You should check whether the pseudopotentials are appropriate or not by performing calculations of simple systems before you calculate systems that you are interested in e Make smooth core densities for the partial core correction If not so numerical instabilities appear often since a high energy cutoff is needed for accurate numerical integrations You will find the further details in the manual of the program package ADPACK However it is noted that generation of good pseudopotentials requires considerable experiences more than what we think at the beginning 48 11 Cutoff energy grid fineness for numerical integrations 11 1 Convergence The computational effort and accuracy depend on the cutoff energy which is controlled by the keyword scf energycutoff for the numerical integrations and the solutio
23. once the localized basis orbitals with specific cutoff radii are chosen for each region the two conditions can be always satisfied by just adjusting the size of the unit cells for L and R Although the specification of unit cells for the regions Lo Co and Ry is not required it should be noted that some periodicity is implicitly assumed The construction of infinite leads is made by employing the unit cells used in the band structure calculations by the step 1 and the informations are stored in a file hks Also due to the structural configuration shown in Fig 29 the unit vectors on the bc plane for the left and right leads should be consistent Thus the unit vector on the bc plane for the extended central region C is implicitly assumed to be same as that of the leads Within the structural limitation you can set up the structural configuration The unit in the specification of the geometrical structure can be given by Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit Ang AnglAU In the NEGF calculation either Ang or AU for Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit is supported but FRAC is not How OpenMX analyzes the geometrical structure can be confirmed by the standard output as shown below 127 lt TRAN_Calc_GridBound gt FEA ak ak 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K K K K K K aK ak 2k aK 2K 2K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K K K 21 K K K K 2 2 2 3K 2K 2K The extended cell consists of Left0 Center Right0 The cells of
24. polarization in the LDA U method on means that the enhancement is made off no enhancement Figure 25 shows the spin orientation in a MnO molecule calculated by the non collinear DFT You can follow the calculation using an input file Mol_MnO_NC dat in the directory work To visualize the spin orientation in real space two files are generated 103 nc xsf ncsden xsf where means System Name you specified Two files nc xsf and ncsden xsf store a projected spin orientation to each atom by Mulliken analysis and the spin orientation on real space grids in a vector file format XSF supported by XCrySDen Both the files can be visualized using Display Forces in XCrySDen as shown in Fig 25 The spin moment and Euler angles of each atom which are calculated by Mulliken analysis are found in the file out as follows FEA IO ak ak ak OI 3k 3K 3K K K K K aK K aK KR A A A A 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K K K aK K K K K K K 1 KF FEA AAAI 3k K K aK K K K aK aK ak ak IE CIC ACA A A I 3K K K K 21 K 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 2K 2 3K 3K 2K 2K Mulliken populations ak k k AAAI 3K K K aK K K K K CICA A A A A 3K 3K K K I K K 21 21 21 24 21 21 21 2 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K FEAR ROKR I I AK Total spin moment muB 4 998503442 Angles Deg 44 991211196 0 000000000 Up Down Sum Diff theta phi 1 Mn 9 59803 4 76902 14 36705 4 82901 44 99208 0 00000 2 O 3 40122 3 23173 6 63295 0 16949 4
25. 000000 45 C 0 000000 0 000000 6 744142 48 177 51 Interface for developers An interface for developers is provided If you want to use the Kohn Sham Hamiltonian the overlap and the density matrices Then these data can be utilized by the following steps 1 HS fileout Include the keyword HS fileout in your input file as follows HS fileout on onloff default off Then these data are output to a file scfout where means System Name in your input file 2 make analysis_example In the directory source compile by make analysis_example Then an executable file analysis_example is generated in the directory work 3 analysis_example scfout Move to the directory work and then perform the program as follows analysis_example scfout or analysis_example scfout gt HS out You can find the elements of the Hamiltonian the overlap and the density matrices in a file HS out 4 explanation of analysis_example In a file analysis_example c you can find a detailed description for these data A part of the description is as follows FEA 3K 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K K K K K K aK 2K ak ak 2k ak 2k 3K 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K I I I I I I Ik 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 25 5 3K 3K 3K 3K A 3K K 3K K K K K K K You can utilize a filename scfout which is generated by the SCF calculation of OpenMX by the following procedure 1 Define your main routine as follows int main int argc char argv 2 I
26. 130 NEGF bias neq im energy 129 130 NEGF bias voltage 129 NEGF Dos energy div 131 NEGF Dos energyrange 131 NEGF Dos Kgrid 131 NEGF filename hks 125 NEGF filename hks 1 129 NEGF filename hks r 129 NEGF gate voltage 130 NEGF Num Poles 129 NEGF Output for TranMain 133 NEGF output_hks 125 NEGF Poisson Solver 130 NEGF scf Kegrid 129 131 NEGF tran energydiv 131 NEGF tran energyrange 131 NEGF tran interpolate 135 NEGF tran interpolate coes 135 NEGF tran interpolate filel 135 NEGF tran interpolate file2 135 NEGF tran Kgrid 131 133 194 NH Mass HeatBath 34 Num CntOrb Atoms 31 78 num HOMOs 36 num LUMOs 36 OpticalConductivity fileout 122 orbitalOpt criterion 31 78 orbitalOpt HistoryPulay 31 78 orbitalOpt Method 30 76 orbitalOpt Opt maxIter 30 78 orbitalOpt Opt Method 30 78 orbitalOpt scf maxlter 30 78 orbitalOpt SD step 31 78 orbitalOpt StartPulay 31 78 orderN Exact Inverse S 32 83 84 orderN Expand Core 32 84 orderN FNAN SNAN 85 orderN HoppingRanges 32 80 81 83 92 orderN KrylovH order 32 83 orderN KrylovS order 32 83 84 orderN Recalc Buffer 32 84 partial charge 166 partial charge energy window 166 RightLeadAtoms Number 127 RightLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 127 scf Constraint NC Spin 27 113 114 scf Constraint NC Spin v 27 113 scf criterion 29 92 130 scf dftD 167 scf EigenvalueSolver 27 39 40 80 128 153 scf
27. 1IDFFT NumGridk 30 1IDFFT NumGridR 30 Atoms Cont Orbitals 31 78 Atoms Number 25 126 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 25 47 60 65 114 115 126 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit 25 127 Atoms Unit Vectors 26 70 177 Atoms Unit Vectors Unit 26 Band dispersion 35 144 Band kpath 35 Band KPath UnitCell 35 69 70 Band Nkpath 35 40 CntOrb fileout 31 78 DATA PATH 23 Definition of Atomic Species 24 42 47 66 77 105 140 141 DFTD IntDirection 167 DF TD periodicity 167 DFTD rcut 167 DFTD scale6 167 DFTD Unit 167 Dos Erange 37 71 73 Dos fileout 36 40 73 74 122 131 Dos Kgrid 37 71 DosGauss file 74 DosGauss fileout 73 74 DosGauss Width 73 ESM buffer range 156 ESM potential diff 156 ESM switch 156 ESM wall height 156 ESM wall position 156 HS fileout 37 116 120 178 Hubbard U values 27 109 LeftLeadAtoms Number 126 LeftLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 126 level of fileout 24 38 40 98 level of stdout 23 101 MD EvsLC Step 169 MD Fixed XYZ 32 60 65 MD Init Velocity 34 65 MD maxlter 33 58 161 169 MD NEB Number Images 161 MD NEB Spring Const 161 MD Opt criterion 33 161 MD Opt DIIS History 33 59 161 MD Opt StartDIIS 33 59 161 MD TempControl 33 62 64 MD TimesStep 33 MD Type 32 59 62 160 169 MD type 58 memory usage fileout 182 MO fileout 36 39 98 MO kpoint 36 98 MO Nkpoint 36 NEGF bias neq energy step 129
28. 2 0 2 0 2 C 0 890 0 890 0 89 2 0 2 0 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt Atoms UnitVectors Unit Ang Ang AU lt Atoms UnitVectors 1 7800 1 7800 0 0000 1 7800 0 0000 1 7800 0 0000 1 7800 1 7800 Atoms UnitVectors gt scf Kgrid Ck of means ni x n2 x n3 The unit cell for the band dispersion and k paths are given by Band dispersion on onloff default off lt Band KPath UnitCell 3 56 0 00 0 00 0 00 3 56 0 00 0 00 0 00 3 56 Band KPath UnitCell gt Band Nkpath 5 lt Band kpath 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 00 0 gX 15 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 50 0 XW 15 1 00 50 0 0 50 50 5 WL 15 0 50 50 5 0 00 00 0 Lg 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00 0 gX Band kpath gt Then we execute OpenMX as openmx Cdia dat 68 eV Figure 12 Band dispersion of carbon diamond The input file is Cdia dat in the directory work When the execution is completed normally then you can find a file cdia Band in the directory work If Band KPath UnitCell does not exist the unit cell specified by the Atoms Unit Vectors will be used 2 Converting of the data to a gnuplot form There is a file bandgnul3 c in the directory source Compile the file as follows gcc bandgnui3 c lm o bandgnu13 When the compile is completed normally then you can find an executable file bandgnul3 in the directory source Please copy the executable file to the directory work Using the executable file bandgn
29. 41 18 9200 5 large2 example Pt500 dat 171 35 12500 6 large2_example R TiO2 1050 dat 35 57 15750 7 large2 example Sil000 dat 48 34 13000 The dimension of the Kohn Sham Hamiltonian is of the order of 10000 and the elapsed time per SCF step is around 40 seconds for all the systems implying that the difference in the total elapsed time mainly comes from the difference in the SCF iterations to achieve the SCF convergence of 10e 10 Hartree for the band energy 23 2 Combination of the O N and conventional schemes Although the O N methods can treat large scale systems consisting of more than 1000 atoms a serious problem is that information about wave functions is lost in the O N methods implemented in OpenMX A simple way of obtaining wave functions and the corresponding eigenvalues for the large scale systems is firstly to employ the O N methods to obtain a self consistent charge density 91 and then is to just once diagonalize using the conventional diagonalization method under the self consistent charge density to obtain full wave functions As an illustration of this procedure we show a large scale calculation of a multiply connected carbon nanotube MCCN consisting of 564 carbon atoms First the SCF calculation of a MCCN was performed using the O N Krylov subspace method and 16 CPU cores of a 2 6 GHz Xeon where C5 0 s2p1 basis function 130 Ryd scf energycutoff 1 0e 7 scf criterion 6 5 A orderN HoppingRanges orderN Kr
30. 94 39497736 2 54174776 a 0 1 0 529177 1 050 Table 5 Calculated Born effective charge of Na in a NaCl bulk The input file is NaCl dat in the directory work Another theoretical value FD Ref 72 and experimental value Ref 73 are also shown for comparison OpenMX FD Expt Z 1 05 1 09 1 12 118 Note that in the NaCl bulk the off diagonal terms in the tensor of Born charge are zero and Zz Zyy Zz In Table 5 we see that the calculated value is in good agreement with the other calculation 72 and an experimental result 73 The calculation of macroscopic polarization is supported for both the collinear and non collinear DFT It is also noted that the code polB has been parallelized for large scale systems where the number of processors can exceed the number of atoms in the system 119 36 Exchange coupling parameter To analyze an effective interaction between spins located on two atomic sites an exchange coupling parameter between two localized spins can be evaluated based on Green s function method 14 15 In OpenMX Ver 3 7 the evaluation is supported for only the collinear calculations of cluster and bulk systems Also the MPI parallelization of jx is supported only when the eigenvalue solver is band while the parallelization is not supported for cluster If you want to calculate the exchange coupling parameter between two spins which are localized to different atomic
31. Atomic Species Please specify atomic species by giving both the file name of pseudo atomic basis orbitals and pseu dopotentials which must be existing in the directories DFT_DATA13 PAO and DFT_DATA13 VP9 respectively For example they are specified as follows lt Definition of Atomic Species H H5 0 si gt 1pi gt 1 H_CA13 C C5 0 si gt ipi gt 1 C_CA13 Definition of Atomic Species gt The beginning of the description must be lt Definition of Atomic Species and the last of the descrip tion must be Definition of Atomic Species gt In the first column you can give any name to specify the atomic species The name is used in the specification of atomic coordinates by Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates In the second column the file name of the pseudo atomic basis or bitals without the file extension and the number of primitive orbitals and contracted orbitals are given Here we introduce an abbreviation of the basis orbital we used as H4 0 s1 gt 1p1 gt 1 where H4 0 indi cates the file name of the pseudo atomic basis orbitals without the file extension which must exist in the directory DFT_DATA13 PAO s1 gt 1 means that one optimized orbitals are constructed from one primitive orbitals for the s orbital which means no contraction Also in case of s1 gt 1 corresponding to no contraction you can use a simple notation s1 instead of s1 gt 1 Thus H4 0 slp1 is equivalent to H4 0 s1 gt 1p1 gt 1 In the t
32. DFT calculation as much as possible The ESP fitting charge is calculated by the following two steps 100 1 SCF calculation After finishing a usual SCF calculation you have two output files out vhart cube There is no additional keyword to generate the two files which are default output files by the SCF calculation while the keyword level of stdout should be 1 or 2 2 ESP fitting charge Let us compile a program code for calculating the ESP fitting charge Move the directory source and then compile as follows make esp When the compilation is completed normally then you can find an executable file esp in the directory out and vhart cube using the work The ESP fitting charge can be calculated from two files program esp For example you can calculate them for a methane molecule shown in the Section Input file as follows esp met c 0 s 1 4 2 0 Then it is enough to specify the file name without the file extension however two files met out and met vhart cube must exist in the directory work The options c and s are key parameters to specify a constraint and scale factors You can find the following statement in the header part of a source code esp c constraint parameter c 0 means charge conservation c 1 means charge and dipole moment conservation 8 scale factors for vdw radius s 1 4 2 0 mean
33. FK FK FK FK FK K K K K dd 2K FK FK FK 2K ok ak ok Sum of Voronoi charges for up 3 999999031463 3 999999031463 7 999998062926 Sum of Voronoi charges for down Sum of Voronoi charges for total Total spin S by Voronoi charges 0 000000000000 Up spin Down spin Sum Diff Atom 1 1 137912511 1 137912511 2 275825021 0 000000000 Atom 2 0 715521700 0 715521700 1 431043399 0 000000000 Atom 3 0 715521486 0 715521486 1 431042973 0 000000000 Atom 4 0 715521776 0 715521776 1 431043552 0 000000000 Atom 5 0 715521559 0 715521559 1 431043118 0 000000000 Clearly we see that carbon atom Atom 1 and hydrogen atoms Atom 2 5 tend to possess less charge and much charge respectively from a chemical sense However the Voronoi analysis could be a useful and complementary information for a bulk system with a closed pack structure 28 3 Electro static potential fitting For small molecular systems the electro static potential ESP fitting method 65 66 67 is useful to determine an effective charge of each atom while the ESP fitting method cannot be applied for large molecules and bulk systems since there are not enough sampling points for atoms far from surface areas in the ESP fitting method In the ESP fitting method an effective point net charge on each atom is determined by a least square method with constraints so that the sum of the electro static potential by effective point charges can reproduce electro static potential calculated by the
34. K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K Rd FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K FK FK FK FK FK K 2 K K K K K K 2K FK FK FK FK FK K K K 2K od K K K K Constraint charge Scale factors for vdw radius 1 40000 2 00000 Number of grids in a van der Waals shell 28464 Volume per grid 0 0235870615 Bohr 3 Success Atom 1 Fitting Effective Charge 0 93558216739 Atom 2 Fitting Effective Charge 0 23389552572 Atom 3 Fitting Effective Charge 0 23389569182 Atom 4 Fitting Effective Charge 0 23389535126 Atom 5 Fitting Effective Charge 0 23389559858 Magnitude of dipole moment 0 0000015089 Debye Component x y Z 0 0000003114 0 0000002455 0 0000014558 RMS between the given ESP and fitting charges Hartree Bohr 3 0 096515449505 102 29 Non collinear DFT A fully unconstrained non collinear density functional theory DFT is supported including the spin orbit coupling SOC 6 7 8 9 13 When the non collinear DFT is performed the following option for the keyword scf SpinPolarization is available scf SpinPolarization NC On Off NC If the option NC is specified wave functions are expressed by a two component spinor An initial spin orientation of each site is given by lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit Ang 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 8 0 5 0 45 0 0 0 45 0 0 0 1 on 1 70000 0 00000 0 00000 3 0 3 0 45 0 0 0 45 0 0 0 1 on Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt 10 Ti 12 13 O ON DOP U N Be sequential serial number species name
35. MD Fixed XYZ 1 111 2 100 MD Fixed XYZ gt The example is for a system consisting of two atoms If you have N atoms then you have to provide N rows in this specification The 1st column is the same sequential number to specify atom as in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates The 2nd 3rd and 4th columns are flags for the x y and z coordinates respectively 1 means that the coordinate is fixed and 0 relaxed In the above example the x y and z coordinates of the atom 1 are fixed only the x coordinate of the atom 2 is fixed The default setting is that all the coordinates are relaxed The fixing of atomic positions are valid all the geometry optimizers and molecular dynamics schemes MD maxIter The keyword MD maxlter gives the number of MD iterations MD TimeStep The keyword MD TimeStep gives the time step fs MD Opt criterion When any of the geometry optimizers is chosen for the keyword MD Type then the keyword MD Opt criterion specifies a convergence criterion Hartree Bohr The geometry optimization is finished when a condition the maximum force on atom is smaller than MD Opt criterion is satisfied MD Opt DIIS History The keyword MD Opt DIIS History gives the number of previous steps to estimate the optimized structure used in the geometry optimization by DIIS EF and RF The default value is 3 MD Opt StartDIIS T
36. Rd Ral RR FK FK FK K K K ll dd ale FK K dla K 2K 2K ol ok ak ok OK Electric dipole Debye Berry phase KKK kK kK K FK FK RR Rd dl FK FK FK FK FK K K K K Ral FK K K ld 2K FK lok kk OK Absolute dipole moment 163 93373639 Background Core Electron Total Dx 0 00000000 94 64718996 0 00000338 94 64718658 117 Dy 0 00000000 94 64718996 0 00000283 94 64718713 Dz 0 00000000 94 64718996 0 00000317 94 64718679 AR RR Rd dl K K dl dll FK K K K al dd FK FK dd ol al K gt K OK gt K ak Electric polarization muC cm 2 Berry phase della lalalala II II II I AI A A AI aA a AK Background Core Electron Total Px 0 00000000 707 66166752 0 00002529 707 66164223 Py 0 00000000 707 66166752 0 00002118 707 66164633 Pz 0 00000000 707 66166752 0 00002371 707 66164381 Elapsed time 77 772559 s for myid 0 Since the Born effective charge Z g is defined by a tensor VAP P le Aug where V is the volume of the unit cell e the elementary charge Aug displacement along P coordinate AP the change of macroscopic polarization along a coordinate therefore we will perform the above procedures 1 and 2 at least two or three times by varying the x y or z coordinate of Na atom Then for example we have along x coordinates Px 94 39497736 Debye unit cell at x 0 05 Ang Px 94 64718658 Debye unit cell at x 0 0 Ang Px 94 89939513 Debye unit cell at x 0 05 Ang Thus zx 9489939513
37. Si in diamond structure It is obtained with an initial guess of sp3 hybrid 39 3 Monitoring Optimization of Spread Function The output during optimization steps is printed to standard output To monitor the optimiza tion progress the following method may be helpful For convenient we assume the standard out put is stored in a file stdout std The following example is for Si dat which can be found in openmx work wf example and each user can trace the same calculation DISE Monitor the self consistent loops for disentangling progress the first step of optimization grep DISE stdout std 145 Iter Omega_I Angs 2 Delta_I Angs 2 gt DISE 1 18 371525257652 18 371525257652 gt DISE 2 17 955767336391 0 415757921261 gt DISE 3 17 659503060694 0 296264275698 gt DISE l 4 17 454033576174 0 205469484520 gt DISE l 5 17 311180447271 0 142853128902 gt DISE 6 17 210945408916 0 100235038355 gt DISE 7 17 139778800398 0 071166608519 gt DISE 8 17 088603102826 0 051175697572 gt DISE l 9 17 051329329614 0 037273773211 gt DISE 10 17 023842837298 0 027486492316 gt DISE where Iter Omega_I and Delta T mean the iteration number the gauge invariant part of the spread function and its difference between two neighboring steps The criterion given by the keyword Wannier
38. a the highest occupied molecular orbital HOMO and b the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital LUMO of a multiply connected carbon nanotube MCCN consisting of 564 carbon atoms where 0 005 was used as an isovalue of the molecular orbital 94 24 Electric field It is possible to apply a uniform external electric field given by a sawtooth waveform during the SCF calculation and the geometry optimization For example when an electric field of 1 0 GV m 109 V m is applied along the a axis please specify the keyword scf Electric Field in your input file as follows scf Electric Field 1 0 0 0 0 0 default 0 0 0 0 0 0 GV m The sign of electric field is taken as that applied to electrons If the uniform external electric field is ap plied to a periodic bulk system without vacuum region discontinuities of the potential are introduced which may cause numerical instability On the other hand for molecular systems the discontinuities are located in the vacuum region indicating that numerical instability may not be induced As an illustration of the electric field changes of total charge in a nitrobenzene molecule induced by the electric field are shown in Fig 22 We can see that a large charge transfer takes place among oxygens in NOs para carbon atom and para hydrogen atom The input file is Nitro_Benzene dat in the directory work See also Section Analysis of difference in two Gaussian cube files as for the diffe
39. adjusted after the input file is read Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates The atomic coordinates and the number of spin charge are given by the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates as follows lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 2 0 2 0 2 H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 3 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 4 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 5 4H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The beginning of the description must be lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates and the last of the de scription must be Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The first column is a sequential serial number for identifying atoms The second column is given to specify the atomic species which must be given in the first column of the specification of the keyword Definition of Atomic Species in advance In the third fourth and fifth columns x y and z coordinates are given When FRAC is chosen for the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit the third fourth and fifth columns are fractional coordinates spanned by a b and c axes where the coordinates can range from 0 5 to 0 5 and the coordinates beyond its range will be automatically adjusted after the input file is read The sixth and seventh columns give the number of initial charges for up and down spin states of each atom respectively The sum of up and down charges must be the number of valence electrons for
40. at the I point is the F center state You can follow the calculation using NaCl_FC dat in the directory work 9 6 Specification of a directory storing PAO and VPS files The path to the VPS and PAO directories can be specified in your input file by the following keyword DATA PATH DFT_DATA13 default DFT_DATA13 Both the absolute and relative specifications are possible PAO files in a database should not be used for the VPS in other databases since semicore states included in several elements are different from each other So the consistency in the version of PAO and VPS must be kept For that reason it would be better to store PAO and VPS files of each version in different directories In this case the keyword is useful 46 10 Pseudopotentials The core Coulomb potential in OpenMX is replaced by a tractable norm conserving pseudopotential proposed by Morrison Bylander and Kleinman 23 which is a norm conserving version of the ultrasoft pseudopotential by Vanderbilt 24 Although the pseudopotentials can be generated using ADPACK which is a program package for atomic density functional calculations and available from a web site http www openmx square org for your convenience we offer a database http www openmx square org of the pseudopotentials as the database Ver 2013 If you want to use pseudopotentials stored in the database then copy them to the directory openmx3 7 DFT_DATA13 VPS while mo
41. basis functions When a large number of basis functions is used for dense bulk systems with fcc hcp and bce like structures the basis set tends to be overcomplete In such a case you may observe erratic eigenvalues To avoid the overcompleteness a small number of optimized basis functions should be used Another way to avoid the problem is to switch off the keyword scf ProExpn VNA as scf ProExpn VNA off onloff default on In this case you may need to increase the cutoff energy for the numerical grid in real space by the keyword scf energycutoff Difficulty in getting the SCF convergence For large scale systems with a complex non collinear magnetic structure a metallic electric structure or the mixture it is quite difficult to get the SCF convergence In such a case one has to mix the charge density very slowly indicating that the number of SCF steps to get the convergence becomes large unfortunately Difficulty in getting the optimized structure For weak interacting systems such as molecular systems it is not easy to obtain a completely optimized structure leading that the large number of iteration steps is required Although the default value of criterion for geometrical optimization is 1074 Hartree Bohr for the largest force it would be a compromise to increase the criterion from 1074 to 5 x 1074 in such a case 185 58 OpenMX Forum For discussion of technical issues on OpenMX and ADPACK there is a foru
42. basis functions provided by the database Ver 2013 9 4 Optimization of PAO by yourself 2 2 ee 9 5 Empty atom Schemes s me v2 joa A ea lt ae og 9 6 Specification of a directory storing PAO and VPS files o 10 Pseudopotentials 11 Cutoff energy grid fineness for numerical integrations dil Convergence n E y kas Gos eu E ee eG EA Goa ae 2 11 2 A tip for calculating the energy curve for bulks 004 11 3 Fixing the relative position of regular grid 20200000004 o oo 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 14 20 21 22 22 23 38 41 42 42 42 43 44 45 46 47 12 SCF convergence 121 Gerneral sariek aa e E E ee 12 2 Automatic determination of Kerker s factor o 0000002 eee 12 3 On the fly control of SCF mixing parameters 00 000000 0G 13 Restarting TEL General uniera rs Gate eh eh weed a tye ee we eid La ah 13 2 Extrapolation scheme during MD and geometry optimization 13 3 Input file for the restart calculation 2 2 ee 14 Geometry optimization 14 1 Steepest decent optimization ee 14 2 EF BFGS RF and DIIS optimizations 004 14 3 Constrained relaxation ee 14 4 Restart of geometry optimization ee 15 Molecular dynamics 15 1 NVE molecular dynamics 15 2 NVT molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling o o 15 3 NVT molecular dyna
43. by sp3 is 4 Similarly sp and sp2 contain 2 and 3 projectors respectively A list of supported PAOs and hybridizations among them can be found in Table 6 Any name other than those listed is not allowed The projector can be centered anywhere inside the unit cell To specify its location we can use the fractional FRAC coordinates relative to the unit cell vectors or Cartesian coordinates in atomic unit AU or in angstrom ANG The corresponding keyword is Wannier Initial Projectors Unit Wannier Initial Projectors Unit FRAC AU ANG or FRAC K grid mesh and b vectors connecting neighboring k points The Monkhorst Pack k grid mesh is defined by keyword Wannier Kgrid There is no default setting for it To use finite difference approach for calculating k space differentials b vectors connecting neighboring k points are searched shell by shell according to the distance from a central k point The maximum number of searched shells is defined by keyword Wannier MaxShells Default value is 12 and it should be increased if failure in finding a set of proper b vectors The problem may happen in case of a system having a large aspect ratio among unit vectors and in this case you will see an error message while the value 12 works well in most cases A proper setting of Wannier Kgrid will also help to find b vectors where the grid spacing by the discretization for each reciprocal lattice vector should be nearly
44. by the following keyword OutData bin flag on default off onloff Then all large sized files will be output in binary mode The default is off The output binary files are converted using a small code bin2txt c stored in the directory source which can be compiled as gcc bin2txt c lm o bin2txt As a post processing you will be able to convert as bin2txt bin The functionality will be useful for machines of which IO access is not fast 183 56 Examples of the input files For your convenience the input files of examples shown in the manual are available in the directory work as listed below Molecules or clusters C60 dat C60_DC dat CG15c_DC dat Cr2_CNC dat Doped_NT dat Fe2 dat Gly_NH dat Gly_VS dat H20 dat MCCN dat Methane2 dat Methane dat Methane_00 dat Mn12 dat Mo1_Mn0_NC dat Nitro_Benzene dat Pt13 dat Pt63 dat SialicAcid dat Valorphin_DC dat C2H4_NEB dat C60_LD dat Bulk Cdia dat MnO_NC dat FeD_NC dat CoO_NC dat Ni0_NC dat Crys Ni0 dat DIA64_Band dat DIA8_DC dat DIA64_DC dat DIA216_DC dat DIA512_DC dat DIA512 1 dat Febcc2 dat GaAs dat NaCl dat SCF calc of a C60 molecule DC calc of a C60 molecule DC calc of DNA Constrained DFT calc of a Cr2 dimer SCF calc of doped carbon nanotube SCF calc Nose Hoover MD of a glycine molecule of a Fe2 dimer Velocity scaling MD of a glycine molecule Geometry of a water molecule DC calc Geometry SCF calc
45. c 1m o diff_geo When the compile is completed normally then you can find an executable file diff_geo in the directory source Please copy the executable file to the directory work 2 Calculation of the difference You can find the following usage in the header part of diff_geo c usage diff_geo filel xyz file2 xyz d rmsd option d rmsd a root mean square of deviation d md a mean deviation d mdbl 2 2 a mean deviation between bond lengths 2 2 Ang means a cutoff bond length which can be taken into account in the calculation If you want to know RMSD between two Cartesian coordinates run as follows diff_geo filel xyz file2 xyz d rmsd 173 b Figure 44 a Vectors corresponding to the deviation of atomic coordinates in optimized structures and b the difference of total charge density between a neutral and one electron doped glycine molecule These figures were visualized by XCrySDen In Fig b blue and red colors indicate the decrease and increase of total charge density respectively The calculated result appears in the standard output your display Also a xsf file dgeo_vec xsf is generated in the XCrySDen format which stores the difference between Cartesian coordinates of each atom in a vector form This file can be visualized using Display Forces in XCrySDen When MDBL is calculated please give a cutoff bond length A Bond lengths below the cutoff bond length are take
46. case files cl negf 0 5 tranb and cl negf 1 0 tranb specified by the keywords NEGF tran interpolate filel and NEGF tran interpolate file2 are the results under bias voltages of 0 5 and 1 0 V respectively and the transmission and current at V 0 7 x 0 5 0 3 x 1 0 0 65 V are evaluated by the interpolation scheme where the weights of 0 7 and 0 3 are specified by the keyword NEGF tran interpolate coes A comparison between the fully self consistent and the interpolated results is shown with respect to the current and transmission in the linear carbon chain in Figs 32 a and b In this case the SCF calculations at three bias voltages of 0 0 5 and 1 0 V are performed and the results at the other bias voltages are obtained by the interpolation scheme For comparison we also calculate the currents via the SCF calculations at all the bias voltages It is confirmed that the simple interpolation scheme gives notably accurate results for both the calculations of the current and transmission Although the proper selection of bias voltages used for the SCF calculations may depend on systems the result suggests that the simple scheme is very useful to interpolate the effect of the bias voltage while keeping the accuracy of the calculations 38 7 Parallelization of NEGF In the current implementation the NEGF calculation is parallelized by MPI In addition to the MPI parallelization if you use ACML or MKL the matrix multip
47. change the keyword Wannier Function Plot to be on The default value of it is off Wannier Function Plot on default off Wannier Function Plot SuperCells 111 default 0 0 0 If it is turned on all the MLWFs will be plotted They are written in Gaussian Cube file format with the extension file name like mlwfl_4_r cube The file is named in the same style as HOMO or LUMO molecular orbitals files The first number after mlwf indicates the spin index and the following one are index of MLWF s and the last letter r or 1 means the real or imaginary part of the MLWF Users can set the supercell size for plotting MLWF It is defined by the keyword Wannier Function Plot SuperCells 1 1 1 in the above example means that the unit cell is extended by one in both the plus and minus directions along the a b and c axes by putting the home unit cell at the center and therefore the MLWFs are plotted in an extended cell consisting of 27 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 cells in this case Figure 35 b shows one of the eight converged MLWFs from four valence states and four conduction states near Fermi level of Si in diamond structure 144 Figure 35 a The interpolated band structure symbolic line of Si in diamond structure is compared with original band structure solid line b One of the eight converged MLWFs from four valence states and four conduction states near Fermi level of
48. cutoff radius and the number of basis functions for each element The input files used for the benchmark calculations are also available on the web site which may be useful for users to get used to the OpenMX calculations at the initial stage The accuracy of the database 2013 was validated by the delta factor 27 The mean delta factor of 71 elements is 1 538 meV atom with the standard deviation of 1 423 meV atom which implies high accuracy of the database 2013 Users are strongly encouraged to use the new database due to the high accuracy See also the section Calculation of Energy vs lattice constant 9 4 Optimization of PAO by yourself Starting from the primitive basis functions you can optimize the radial shape variationally so that the accuracy can be increased See the details in the Section Orbital optimization 44 eye Figure 3 The isosurface map of the highest occupied state at the I point for NaCl with a Cl site vacancy which shows a F center in NaCl with a Cl vacancy The isosurface map was drawn using XCrySDen with the isovalue of 0 042 61 The calculation was done with the system charge of 1 using a keyword scf system charge The watery and silver colors correspond to sodium and chlorine atoms respectively and the yellow small ball shows the position of empty atom 9 5 Empty atom scheme The primitive and optimized PAO functions are usually assigned to atoms Moreover it is possible to assi
49. default off Setting the number of target MLWFs The number of target MLWFs should be given explicitly by setting a keyword Wannier Func Num and no default value for it Wannier Func Num 4 no default Energy window for selecting Bloch states The MLWFs will be generated from a set of Bloch states which are selected by defining an energy window covering the eigenenergies of them Following Ref 79 two energy windows are introduced One is so called outer window defined by two keywords Wannier Outer Window Bottom and Wannier Outer Window Top indicating the lower and upper boundaries respectively The other one is inner window which is specified by two similar key words Wannier Inner Window Bottom and Wannier Inner Window Top All these four values are given in units eV relative to Fermi level The inner window should be fully inside of the outer window If the two boundaries of inner window are equal to each other it means inner window is not defined and not used in calculation There is no default values for outer window while 0 0 is the default value for two boundaries of inner window One example is as following 139 Wannier Quter Window Bottom 14 0 lower boundary of outer window no default value Wannier Outer Window Top 0 0 upper boundary of outer window no default value Wannier Inner Window Bottom 0 0 lower boundary of inner window default value 0 0 Wannier Inner Window Top 0 0 upper bound
50. determined by a keyword orderN HoppingRanges The numbers of the first and second neighboring atoms determined by the keyword are shown in the standard output as FNAN and SNAN respectively In addition to the use of the keyword orderN HoppingRanges for determining FNAN and SNAN one can directory control the number FNAN SNAN by the following keyword 85 lt orderN FNAN SNAN 1 60 2 65 3 60 4 50 orderN FNAN SNAN gt In this specification the number of row should be equivalent to that of atoms The first column is a se rial number corresponding to the serial number defined in the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates and the second column is the number of FNAN SNAN Then the first and second neighboring atoms in each truncated cluster are determined by taking account of the distance between the central atom and neighboring atoms so that the number of FNAN SNAN can be equivalent to the value provided by the second column FNAN SNAN may largely change when unit vectors are changed leading to sud den change of the total energy as a function of lattice constant The user definition of FNAN SNAN is useful to avoid such a case 86 21 MPI parallelization For large scale calculations parallel execution by MPI is supported for parallel machines with dis tributed memories 21 1 O N calculation When the O N method is employed it is expected that one can obtain a good parallel efficiency because of the inherent al
51. diff Force 0 000000000580 3 large2 example GRA1024 dat Elapsed time s 2245 67 diff Utot 0 000000002291 diff Force 0 000000015333 4 large2_example Th Ice1200 dat Elapsed time s 952 84 diff Utot 0 000000000031 diff Force 0 000000000213 5 large2 example Pt500 dat Elapsed time s 6831 16 diff Utot 0 000000002285 diff Force 0 000000004010 6 large2 example R TiO2 1050 dat Elapsed time s 2259 97 diff Utot 0 000000000106 diff Force 0 000000001249 7 large2_example Sil000 dat Elapsed time s 1655 25 diff Utot 0 000000001615 diff Force 0 000000005764 Total elapsed time s 37407 95 The quality of all the calculations is at a level of production run where double valence plus a single polarization functions are allocated to each atom as basis functions Except for Pt500 dat all the systems include more than 1000 atoms where the last number of the file name implies the number of atoms for each system and the elapsed time implies that geometry optimization for systems consisting of 1000 atoms is possible if several hundreds processor cores are available The input files used for the calculations and the output files are found in the directory work large2_example The following information is compiled from the output files No Input file SCF steps Elapsed time s SCF spin Dimension 1 large2_example C1000 dat 44 35 13000 2 large2 example Fe1000 dat 384 30 13000 3 large2_example GRA1024 dat 54 35 13312 4 large2 example Th Ice1200 dat
52. directory work please specify DC for the keyword scf EigenvalueSolver scf EigenvalueSolver DC 1200 800 Elapsed time s 400 SIAGIN 9ZIS JO0UIIN e Elapsed Tlme E Memory size 0 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Number of atoms in the super cell Figure 15 Elapsed time of the diagonalization part per SCF step and computational memory size per MPI process as a function of carbon atoms in the diamond supercell where 16 processes were used in the MPI parallel calculations C5 0 s1p1 was used as basis functions For the DC method orderN HoppingRanges 6 0 A is used A Xeon machine 2 6 GHz was used to measure the elapsed time The input files are DIA8_DC dat DIA64_DC dat DIA216_DC dat and DIA512_DC dat in the directory work 80 Table 2 Total energy and computational time per MD step of a Cgo molecule and small peptide molecules valorphin 63 and DNA consisting of cytosines and guanines calculated by the conven tional diagonalization and the O N DC method where a minimal basis set was used In this Table numbers in the parenthesis after DC means orderN HoppingRanges used in the DC calculation The computational times were measured using an Opteron PC cluster 48 cpus x 2 4 GHz The input files are C60_DC dat Valorphin_DC dat CG15c_DC dat in the directory work Total energy Hartree Computational time s Ceo 60 a
53. eigenstates OpenMX Ver 3 7 employs ELPA 26 to solve the eigenvalue problem in the cluster calculation which is a highly parallelized eigevalue solver Figure 19 b shows the speed up ratio as a function of processors in the elapsed time for a spin polarized calculation of a single molecular magnet consisting of 148 atoms The input file Mn12 dat is found in the directory work It is found that the speed up ratio is 11 and 17 using 32 and 64 processes respectively 21 3 Band calculation In the band calculation a triple parallelization is made for three loops spin multiplicity k points and eigenstates where the spin multiplicity is one for the spin unpolarized and non collinear calculations and two for the spin polarized calculation respectively The priority of parallelization is in order of spin multiplicity k points and eigenstates In addition when the number of processes used in the parallelization exceeds spin multiplicity x the number of k points OpenMX uses an efficient way in which finding the Fermi level and calculating the density matrix are performed by just one diagonalization at each k point For the other cases twice diagonalizations are performed at each k point for saving the size of used memory in which the second diagonalization is performed to calculate 87 E AA A 120 a 100 e Elapsed Ideal Speed up ratio o o 1 1 li 1 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
54. example the name of files are C_1 pao and H_2 pao where the symbol corresponds to that given by the first column in the specification of the keyword Definition of Atomic Species and the number after the symbol means that of the first column in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates These output files C_1 pao and H_2 pao can be an input data for pseudo atomic orbitals as is 79 20 Order N method The computational effort of the conventional diagonalization scheme scales as the third power of the number of basis orbitals which means that the part could be a bottleneck when large scale systems are calculated On the other hand the O N methods can solve the eigenvalue problem in O N operation in exchange for accuracy Thus O N methods could be efficient for large scale systems while a careful consideration is always required for the accuracy In OpenMX Ver 3 7 two O N methods are available a divide conquer DC method 37 and a Krylov subspace method 30 In the following subsections each O N method is illustrated by examples 20 1 Divide conquer method The DC method is a robust scheme and can be applicable to a wide variety of materials with a reasonable degree of accuracy and efficiency while this scheme is suitable especially for covalent systems In this subsection the O N calculation using the DC method is illustrated In an input file DIA8_DC dat which can be found in the
55. files are Methane2 dat and Si8 dat in the directory work respectively 58 14 2 EF BFGS RF and DIIS optimizations Although Opt is a robust scheme the convergence speed can be slow in general Faster schemes based on quasi Newton methods are available for the geometry optimization They are the eigenvector following EF method 45 the Broyden Fletcher Goldfarb Shanno BFGS method 47 the rational function RF method 46 and a direct inversion iterative sub space DIIS method 44 implemented in Cartesian coordinate In the EF and RF methods the approximate Hessian is updated by the BFGS method Thus five geometry optimizers Opt EF BFGS RF and DIIS are available in OpenMX Ver 3 7 which can be specified by MD Type The relevant keywords are listed below MD Type EF Opt DIIS BFGS RF EF MD Opt DIIS History 3 default 3 MD Opt StartDIIS 5 default 5 MD Opt EveryDIIS 200 default 200 MD maxIter 100 default 1 MD Opt criterion 1 0e 4 default 0 0003 Hartree Bohr Especially you can control these schemes by two keywords MD Opt DIIS History 3 default 3 MD Opt StartDIIS 5 default 5 The keyword MD Opt DIIS History specifies the number of the previous steps to update an optimum Hessian matrix The default value is 3 Also the geometry optimization step at which EF BFGS RF or DIIS starts is specified by the keyword MD Opt StartDIIS The geometry opt
56. following keyword in your input file scf fixed grid xxx yyy ZZZ where xxx yyy zzz is the coordinate of the origin you got in the calculation i Then you will have a cube file for charge spin density Let it be A cube iii calculate the system B As well as the calculation ii this calculation must be performed by the same calculation condition with the same unit cell as in the composite system consisting of A and B Also the coordinates of the system B must be the same as in the calculation i To use the same origin as in the calculation i rather than the use of an automatically determined origin you have to include the following keyword in your input file scf fixed grid xxx yyy ZZZ where xxx yyy zzz is the coordinate of the origin you got in the calculation i Then you will have a cube file for charge spin density Let it be B cube iv compile two codes compile two codes as follows gcc diff_gcube c lm o diff_gcube gcc add_gcube c lm o add_gcube v generate a cube file for difference charge spin density 175 First generate a cube file for the superposition of two charge spin densities of the systems A and B by add_gcube A cube B cube A_B cube The file A_B cube is the cube file for the superposition of charge spin density of two isolated systems Then you can generate a cube file for the difference charge spin density induced by the interaction as foll
57. in the directory work 1 1 101 102 103 101 102 103 lt cdia Dos val gt lt cdia gt Which method do you use Tetrahedron 1 Gaussian Broadeninig 2 1 Do you want Dos 1 or PDos 2 2 Number of atoms 2 Which atoms for PDOS 1 2 ex 1 2 1 pdos_n 1 1 lt Spectra_Tetrahedron gt start Spe_Num_Relation 0 O 1 Spe_Num_Relation O 1 1 Spe_Num_Relation O 2 101 72 Spe_Num_Relation O 3 102 Spe_Num_Relation O 4 103 Spe_Num_Relation O 5 101 Spe_Num_Relation O 6 102 Spe_Num_Relation 0 7 103 make cdia PDOS Tetrahedron atomi si make cdia PDOS Tetrahedron atoml pl make cdia PDOS Tetrahedron atom1 p2 make cdia PDOS Tetrahedron atom1 p3 make cdia PDOS Tetrahedron atom1 The tetrahedron 48 and Gaussian broadening methods for evaluating DOS are available Also you can select DOS or PDOS When you select the calculation of PDOS then please select atoms for evaluating PDOS In this case each DOS projected on orbitals s px pl py p2 pz p3 in selected atoms are output in each file In these files the first and second columns are energy in eV and DOS eV t or PDOS eV7 and the third column is the integrated DOS or PDOS If a spin polarized calculation using LSDA CA LSDA PW or GGA PBE is employed in the SCF calculation the second and third columns in these files correspond to DOS or PDOS for up and down spin states and the fourth and fifth columns are the corresponding integrated values If
58. keyword scf EigenvalueSolver as scf EigenvalueSolver cluster2 The method is supported only for colliear DFT calculations of cluster systems or periodic systems with the point for the Brillouin zone sampling As well as the total energy calculation the force e 1 thread 400 _ 6 2 threads 4 threads v Conventional 1 thread 1 300 A 3 76 sec a L 7 g 200 D Q L 09 100 r ao 1 09 sec O 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Number of Processes Figure 36 Speed up ratio in the parallel computation of the diagonalization in the SCF calculation for DNA by a hybrid scheme using MPI and OpenMP The speed up ratio is defined by 2T2 Tp where T gt and T are the elapsed times obtained by two MPI processes and by the corresponding number of processes and threads The parallel calculations were performed on a CRAY XT5 machine consisting of AMD opteron quad core processors 2 3 GHz The electric temperature of 700 K and 80 poles for the contour integration are used For comparison the speed up ratio for the parallel computation of the conventional scheme using Householder and QR methods is also shown for the case with a single thread The elapsed time at cases pointed by arrow is also shown for both the low order scaling and conventional methods 153 Table 7 Total energy of a C60 molecule calculated by the numerically exact low order scaling method and conventional method and its computational time
59. left and right reads are connected as Left2 Left1 Left0 Center Right0 Right1 Right2 Each atom in the extended cell is assigned as follows where 12 and 2 mean that they are in Left0 and 712 has overlap with atoms in the Left1 and 13 and 3 mean that they are in RightO and 713 has overlap with atoms in the Right1 and also 71 means atom in the Center KKK K K FK FK FK K Rd FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK FK K 2 2 dale FK FK K K K K add al 2 2K od ok ak K OK Atomi 12 Atom2 2 Atom3 1 Atom4 1 Atom5 1 Atom6 1 Atom7 Atom8 1 Atom9 1 Atom10 1 Atomil 1 Atomi2 1 Atom13 1 Atom14 Atomi5 1 Atomi6 1 Atom17 1 Atomi8 1 Atom19 1 Atom20 1 Atom21 Atom22 13 The atoms in the extended cell consisting of Lo Co Ro are assigned by the numbers where 12 and 2 mean that they are in Lo and 12 has overlap with atoms in L and 13 and 3 mean that they are in Ro and 713 has overlap with atoms in R and also 1 means atom in Cp By checking the analysis you may confirm whether the structure is properly constructed or not B Keywords The NEGF calculation of the step 2 is performed by the keyword scf EigenvalueSolver scf EigenvalueSolver NEGF For the NEGF calculation the following keywords are newly added NEGF filename hks 1 lead chain hks NEGF filename hks r lead chain hks NEGF Num Poles 100 defalut 150 NEGF scf Kgri
60. method EF or DIIS is performed by the steepest decent method The prefactor used in the steepest decent method is specified by the keyword orbitalOpt SD step In most cases orbitalOpt SD step of 0 001 can be a good prefactor orbitalOpt criterion The keyword orbitalOpt criterion specifies a convergence criterion Hartree borh for the orbital optimization The iterations loop is finished when a condition Norm of derivatives lt orbitalOpt criterion is satisfied CntOrb fileout If you want to output the optimized radial orbitals to files then the keyword CntOrb fileout must be ON Num CntOrb Atoms The keyword Num CntOrb Atoms gives the number of atoms whose optimized radial orbitals are output to files Atoms Cont Orbitals The keyword Atoms Cont Orbitals specifies the atom number which is given by the first column in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates for the output of optimized orbitals as follows lt Atoms Cont Orbitals 1 2 Atoms Cont Drbitals gt The beginning of the description must be lt Atoms Cont Orbitals and the last of the description must be Atoms Cont Orbitals gt The number of lines should be consistent with the number speci fied in the keyword Atoms Cont Orbitals For example the name of files are C_1 pao and H_2 pao where the symbol corresponds to that given by the first column in the specification of the ke
61. most loop is spin component The next loop is for R and the last two are loops of m and n respectively Each R is written at the first line of each block together with its degeneracy The index of m and n is printed and followed by the real and imaginary parts of hopping integrals in each line An example file generated by the input file Si dat is shown here Real space Hamiltonian in Wannier Gauge on Wigner Seitz supercell Number of Wannier Function 8 Number of Wigner Seitz supercell 617 Lattice vector in Bohr 5 10000 0 00000 5 10000 0 00000 5 10000 5 10000 5 10000 5 10000 0 00000 collinear calculation spinsize 1 Fermi level 0 112747 R 6 2 2 4 1 1 0 000078903162 0 000000003750 1 2 0 000024237763 0 000000000148 1 3 0 000024237691 0 000000000341 1 4 0 000024238375 0 000000004117 1 5 0 000072656918 0 000000000196 1 6 0 000022470544 0 000000000859 1 7 0 000022481557 O 000000000750 1 8 0 000022492706 O 000000000148 2 1 0 000024238091 O 000000000049 151 2 2 0 000078901874 0 000000000011 3 0 000024234912 0 000000000023 39 6 Automatic running test of MLWF To check whether the MLWF calculation part is properly installed or not an automatic running test for the NEGF calculation can be performed by For the MPI parallel running mpirun np 16 openmx runtestWF For the OpenMP MPI parallel running mpirun np 8 openmx runtestWF nt 2 Then OpenMX will run with eight test cases and compare c
62. nt means the number of threads in each process managed by MPI If nt is not specified then the number of threads is set to 1 which corresponds to the flat MPI parallelization Since the parallelization of OpenMX Ver 3 7 is largely changed from OpenMX Ver 3 6 we do not have enough data to validate the hybrid parallelization compared to the flat MPI with respect to efficiency of computation and memory usage However our preliminary benchmark calculations imply that the hybrid parallelization seems to be efficient as for memory usage while the computational efficiency seems to be comparable to each other 90 23 Large scale calculations 23 1 Conventional scheme Using the conventional diagonalization method OpenMX Ver 3 7 is capable of performing geometry optimization for systems consisting of 1000 atoms if several hundreds processor cores are available To demonstrate the capability one can perform runtestL2 as follows mpirun np 128 openmx runtestL2 nt 4 Then OpenMX will run with 7 test files and compare calculated results with the reference results which are stored in work large2_example The following is a result of runtestL2 performed using 128 MPI processes and 4 OpenMP threads on CRAY XC30 1 large2_example C1000 dat Elapsed time s 1731 83 diff Utot 0 000000002838 diff Force 0 000000007504 2 large2 example Fe1000 dat Elapsed time s 21731 24 diff Utot 0 000000010856
63. number of radial grids in the k space The values of the Fourier transformation for radial functions of pseudo atomic orbitals and of the projectors for non local potentials are tabulated on the grids ranging from zero to 1DFFT EnergyCutoff as a func tion of radial axis in the k space The default is 900 1DFFT NumGridR The keyword 1DFFT NumGridR gives the the number of radial grids in real space which is used in the numerical grid integrations of the Fourier transformation for radial functions of pseudo atomic orbitals and of the projectors for non local potentials The default is 900 Orbital Optimization orbitalOpt Method The keyword orbitalOpt Method specifies a method for the orbital optimization When the orbital optimization is not performed then choose OFF When the orbital optimization is performed the following two options are available atoms in which basis orbitals on each atom are fully optimized species in which basis orbitals on each species are optimized In atoms the radial functions of basis orbitals are optimized with a constraint that the radial wave function R is independent on the magnetic quantum number which guarantees the rotational invariance of the total energy However the optimized orbital on all the atoms can be different from each other In the species basis orbitals in atoms with the same species name that you define in Definition of Atomic Species are optimized as the
64. on the real axis are used for the evaluation of the non equilibrium Green function can be confirmed in the standard output and the file out In case of NEGF Chain dat if the bias voltage of 0 5 V is applied you will see in the standard output that the energy points of 120 are allocated for the calculation as follows 129 Intrinsic chemical potential eV of the leads Left lead 7 752843837400 Right lead 7 752843837400 add voltage 0 0000 eV to the left lead new ChemP eV 7 7528 add voltage 0 5000 eV to the right lead new ChemP eV 7 2528 Parameters for the integration of the non equilibrium part lower bound 8 706843837400 eV upper bound 6 298843837400 eV energy step 0 020000000000 eV number of steps 120 The total number of energy points where the Green function is evaluated is given by the sum of the number of poles and the number of energy points on the real axis determined by the two key words NEGF bias neq im energy and NEGF bias neq energy step and you should notice that the computational time is proportional to the total number of energy points NEGF Poisson Solver FD FD FFT default FD In the NEGF method the electrostatic potential is calculated by either a finite difference plus two dimensional FFT FD 54 or three dimensional FFT FFT 56 The choice of the Poisson solver is specified by the keyword NEGF Poisson Solver Both the methods provide similar elect
65. result of the step 2 the transmission and current are calculated by a program code IranMain An example carbon chain As a first trial let us illustrate the three steps by employing a carbon chain Before going to the illustration a code TranMain used in the step 3 has to be compiled in the directory source as follows make TranMain If the compilation is successful you will find the executable file IranMain and may copy it your work directory possibly work Then you can proceed the following three calculations Step 1 openmx Lead Chain dat tee lead chain std A file negf chain hks is generated by the step 1 Step 2 124 N _ Transmission 1 spin 10 5 0 5 10 Energy eV Figure 30 Transmission of a carbon chain as a function of energy The origin of energy is set to the chemical potential of the left lead openmx NEGF Chain dat tee negf chain std A file negf chain tranb is generated by the step 2 Step 3 TranMain NEGF Chain dat negf chain tran0_0 negf chain current and negf chain conductance are generated by the step 3 The calculations can be traced by using the input files stored in a directory of work negf_ example By plotting the sixth column in negf chain tranO_0 as a function of the fourth column you can see a transmission curve as shown in Fig 30 38 2 Step 1 The calculations for leads The calculation of th
66. same orbitals If you want to assign the same orbitals to atoms with almost the same chemical environment and optimize these orbitals this scheme is useful orbitalOpt scf maxIter The maximum number of SCF iterations in the orbital optimization is specified by the keyword or bitalOpt scf maxlter orbitalOpt Opt maxlIter The maximum number of iterations for the orbital optimization is specified by the keyword or bitalOpt Opt maxlter The iteration loop for the orbital optimization is terminated at the number specified by orbitalOpt Opt maxlter even if a convergence criterion is not satisfied orbitalOpt Opt Method 30 Two schemes for the optimization of orbitals are available EF which is an eigenvector following method DIIS which is the direct inversion method in iterative subspace The algorithms are ba sically the same as for the geometry optimization Either EF or DIIS is chosen by the keyword orbitalOpt Opt Method orbitalOpt StartPulay The quasi Newton method EF and DIIS starts from the optimization step specified by the keyword orbitalOpt Start Pulay orbitalOpt HistoryPulay The keyword orbitalOpt HistoryPulay specifies the number of previous steps to estimate the next input contraction coefficients used in the quasi Newton method EF and DIIS orbitalOpt SD step The orbital optimization at optimization steps before moving to the quasi Newton
67. sec for the diagonalization using 8 processes in the MPI parallelization The input file is C60_LO dat in the directory gt work Method Total energy Hartree Computational time sec Low order 343 896238929370 69 759 Conventional 343 896238929326 2 784 calculation by the low order scaling method is supported Thus it is possible to perform geometry optimization However calculations of density of states and wave functions are not supported yet The number of poles in the contour integration 55 is controlled by a keyword scf Npoles ON2 90 The number of poles to achieve convergence does not depend on the size of system 80 but depends on the spectrum radius of system If the electronic temperature more 300 K is used the use of 100 poles is enough to get sufficient convergence for the total energy and forces As an illustration we show a calculation by the numerically exact low order scaling method using an input file C60_LO dat stored in the directorty work mpirun np 8 openmx C60_LO dat As shown in Table 7 the total energy by the low order scaling method is equivalent to that by the conventional method within double precision while the computational time is much longer than that of the conventional method for such a small system We expect that the crossing point between the low order scaling and the conventional methods with respect to computational time is located at around 300 atoms when usi
68. sites you can calculate it by the following two steps 1 SCF calculation First you would perform a collinear DFT calculation using an input file Fe2 dat in the directory work as an example Then you have to set the following keyword HS fileout as follows HS fileout on onloff default off When the execution is completed normally then you can find a file fe2 scfout in the directory work 2 Calculation of exchange coupling parameter Let us compile a program code for calculating the exchange coupling parameter Move the directory source and then compile as follows make jx When the compile is completed normally then you can find an executable file jx in the directory work The exchange coupling parameter can be calculated from the file scfout using the program jx as follows jx fe2 scfout where an iron dimer is considered as an example Then you are interactively asked from the program as follow k K k 3k 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K aK ak ak aK I I I I I I Ik K 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 25 25 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K A 3K K K K 2K K K K K k k k ak ak AA 3K K K K K K aK K aK aK aK CCI I I I I I I K K 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 21 25 25 5 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K K jx code for calculating an effective exchange coupling constant J Copyright C 2003 Myung Joon Han Jaejun Yu and Taisuke Ozaki This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute
69. the interface between the central region Co and the region Lo Ro It should be noted that the electronic transport is assumed to be along the a axis in the current implementation Thus users have to keep in mind the specification when the geometrical structure is constructed See also the subsection Step 1 The calculations for leads Computational flow The NEGF calculation is performed by the following three steps Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Each step consists of 123 Li Lo Co Ro Figure 29 a Configuration of the system treated by the NEGF method with infinite left and right leads along the a axis under a two dimensional periodic boundary condition on the be plane b One dimensional system compacted from the configuration of a by considering the periodicity on Ri the bc plane where the region C is an extended central region consisting of Co Ly and Ro e Step 1 The band structure calculations are performed for the left and right leads using a program code openmx The calculated results will be used to represent the Hamiltonian of the leads in the NEGF calculation of the step 2 e Step 2 The NEGF calculation is performed for the structure shown in Fig 29 under zero or a finite bias voltage using a program code openmx where the result in the step 1 is used for the construction of the leads e Step 3 By making use of the
70. the orbital magnetic moment Table 4 Spin magnetic moment M p and orbital magnetic moment M p of transition metal oxides MO M Mn Fe Co Ni In the LDA U scheme 16 for the first d orbital of M the effective U of 3 0 eV for Mn 5 0 eV for Fe Co for 7 0 eV and Ni for 7 0 eV were used For the others zero The local spin moment was calculated by the Voronoi decomposition discussed in the Section Voronoi charge rather than Mulliken charge since the Mulliken analysis tends to give a larger spin moment in the use of multiple basis functions The input files are MnO_NC dat FeO_NC dat CoO_NC dat and NiO_NC dat in the directory work The other theoretical value 50 and experimental value 50 are also shown for comparison M Mo Compound OpenMX Other calc OpenMX Other calc Expt in total MnO 4 519 4 49 0 004 0 00 4 79 4 58 FeO 3 653 3 54 0 764 1 01 3 32 CoO 2 714 2 53 1 269 1 19 3 35 3 8 NiO 1 687 1 53 0 247 0 27 1 77 1 64 1 90 108 32 LDA U LDA U methods with different definitions of the occupation number operator 16 are available for both the collinear and non collinear calculations by the following keyword scf Hubbard U scf Hubbard U on On Off default off It is noted that the LDA U methods can be applied to not only LDA but also GGA The occupation number operator is specified by the following keyword scf Hubbard Occupation scf Hubbard Occupation dual on
71. the subsection for the specification 15 6 Initial velocity For molecular dynamics simulations it is possible to provide the initial velocity of each atom by the following keyword lt MD Init Velocity 1 3000 000 0 0 0 0 2 3000 000 0 0 0 0 MD Init Velocity gt The example is for a system consisting of two atoms If you have N atoms then you have to provide N rows in this specification The 1st column is the same sequential number to specify atom as in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates The 2nd 3rd and 4th columns are x y and z components of the velocity of each atom respectively The unit of the velocity is m s The keyword MD Init Velocity is compatible with the keyword MD Fixed XYZ 65 15 7 User definition of atomic mass In molecular dynamics simulations OpenMX uses the atomic mass defined in Set_Atom Weight of SetPara_DFT c However one can easily change the atomic mass by the keyword Definition of Atomic Species In such a case the atomic mass is defined by the fourth column as lt Definition of Atomic Species H 4H5 0 st H_PBE13 2 0 C C5 0 sipl C_PBE13 12 0 Definition of Atomic Species gt If the fourth column is not given explicitly then the default atomic mass will be used This may be useful to investigate the effect of atomic mass in molecular dynamics and also may allow us to use a larger time step by using especially the deuterium mass for hydrog
72. values become finite when the SOC is included 74 75 As an example a non collinear LDA U U 5 eV calculation of iron monoxide bulk is illustrated using an input file FeO_NC dat in the directory work As for the LDA U calculation see the Section LDA U The calculated orbital and spin magnetic moments at the Fe site are listed in Table 4 Also you can find the orientation of the decomposed orbital moment in out where means System Name as follows EEEE EKK K Kk K Kk k RR dll KK ok EK K k K Kk K Kk I dd dd dd dd 2K a 2k 3 2k FK 2k K 2k K 2k 3k 2k K 2k Orbital moments EEEE K k K kk GR RR KIRK RK KK a 2k 3 2k 3k 2k K 2k K 2k 3k 2k ok ok KKK K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K dl K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK FK K ll Rd FK FK FK K FK K K K K 2K 2K doll FK OK ok ak ak Total Orbital Moment muB 0 000001885 Angles Deg 126 954120326 185 681623854 Orbital moment muB theta Deg phi Deg 1 Fe 0 76440 131 30039 51 57082 2 Fe 0 76440 48 69972 231 57071 3 O 0 00000 40 68612 210 48405 4 0 00000 48 18387 222 72367 Decomposed Orbital Moments 1 Fe Orbital Moment muB Angles Deg multiple s 0 0 000000000 90 0000 0 0000 sum over m 0 000000000 90 0000 0 0000 s 1 O 000000000 90 0000 0 0000 sum over m 0 000000000 90 0000 0 0000 px 0 0 000055764 42 7669 270 0000 Py 0 0 000046795 28 9750 180 0000 pz 0 0 000044132 90 0000 239 0920 sum over m 0 000120390 47 1503 239 0920 px 1 0 001838092 10 8128 90 0000 py 0 001
73. you select the Gaussian broadening method you are requested to set a parameter value of Gaussian a eV which determines the width of Gaussian defined by exp E a Figure 13 shows DOS and PDOS of carbon diamond 18 2 For calculations with lots of k points Since the calculation of density of states DOS of a large scale system with lots of k points requires a considerable memory size the post processing code DosMain for generating the partial and total DOS tends to suffer from a segmentation fault For such a case a Gaussian DOS scheme is available in which the partial DOS is calculated by the Gaussian broadening method in the OpenMX on the fly calculation and the information of wave functions is not stored in the file Dos vec Since this scheme does not require a large sized memory it can be used to calculate DOS of large scale systems Then you can specify the following keywords in your input file DosGauss fileout on default off onloff DosGauss Num Mesh 200 default 200 DosGauss Width 0 2 default 0 2 eV When you use the scheme specify on for the keyword DosGauss fileout And the keyword Dos Gauss Num Mesh gives the number of partitioning for the energy range specified by the keyword Dos Erange The keyword DosGauss Width gives the width a of the Gaussian exp E a The keyword DosGauss fileout and the keyword Dos fileout are mutually exclusive Therefore wh
74. 0 400 700 0 700 600 0 MD TempControl gt The beginning of the description must be lt MD TempControl and the last of the description must be MD TempControl gt The first number 4 gives the number of the following lines to control the temperature In this case you can see that there are four lines Following the number 4 in the consecutive lines the first and second columns give the MD steps and a given temperature for nuclear motion The temperature between the MD steps explicitly specified by the keyword is given by linear interpolation NH Mass HeatBath In NVT_NH a mass of heat bath is given by the keyword The default mass is 20 where we use the unified atomic mass unit that the principal isotope of carbon atom is 12 0 MD Init Velocity For molecular dynamics simulations it is possible to provide the initial velocity of each atom by the following keyword lt MD Init Velocity 1 3000 000 0 0 0 0 2 3000 000 0 0 0 0 MD Init Velocity gt The example is for a system consisting of two atoms If you have N atoms then you have to provide N rows in this specification The 1st column is the same sequential number to specify atom as in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates The 2nd 3rd and 4th columns are x y and z components of the velocity of each atom The unit of the velocity is m s The keyword MD Init Velocity is compatible with the keyword MD Fixed XYZ
75. 0 005e elim lean ces ail wae 08 AV G 0 Hartree Figure 38 Al Si 111 slab model with vacuum and ideal metal ESMs a Distributions of excess charge in Al Si 111 slab pex b Bias induced changes of Hartree potentials of Al Si 111 slab AVg The number of doped charge is 0 01 0 005 0 005 and 0 01 e Each plot is obtained as a difference in difference charge or difference Hartree potential with reference to a neutral slab with the same ESMs ESM wall position 6 0 default 10 0 ang ESM wall height 100 0 default 100 0 eV where ESM wall position denotes the distance between the upper edge of the cell and the origin of the barrier potential a xp and ESM wall height is the height of the potential value of potential energy at x xp 1 0 A It is also recommended to fix positions of atoms on the bottom of a surface model slab during a MD run 41 2 Example of test calculation Let us show effects of ESMs on the electronic structure of asystem As a demonstration calculation the distribution of excess charge pex in a 1 x 1 Al terminated Si 111 slab under the boundary condition vacuum ideal metal ESM switch on3 is presented in Fig 38 a the input file of this test 157 calculation Al Sill11_ESM dat is found in the work directory It can be seen that segregation of the doped charge in the slab happened due to the attractive interaction between the doped
76. 000000000000 8 input_example Graphite4 dat Elapsed time s 5 00 diff Utot 0 000000002617 diff Force 0 000000015163 9 input _example H20 EF dat Elapsed time s 4 88 diff Utot 0 000000000000 diff Force 0 000000000113 10 input_example H2O dat Elapsed time s 4 60 diff Utot 0 000000000008 diff Force 0 000000013375 11 input example HMn dat Elapsed time s 13 44 diff Utot 0 000000000001 diff Force 0 000000000001 12 input_example Methane dat Elapsed time s 3 64 diff Utot 0 000000000001 diff Force 0 000000002263 13 input_example Mol_MnO dat Elapsed time s 9 43 diff Utot 0 000000003714 diff Force 0 000000000540 14 imput_example Ndia2 dat Elapsed time s 5 67 diff Utot 0 000000000004 diff Force 0 000000000001 Total elapsed time s 138 79 The comparison was made using 8 processes by MPI with 2 treads by OpenMP on the same Xeon cluster machine Since the floating point operation depends on not only computer environment but also the number of processors used in parallel execution we see in the above example that there is a small difference even using the same machine The elapsed time of each job is also output so it is helpful in comparing the computational speed depending on computer environment In the directory work input_example you can find runtest result files generated on several platforms If you want to make reference files by yourself please execute OpenMX as follows openmx maketest Then for input fil
77. 1 14164683 1 55715794 1 55715761 2 95566190 gt CENT WF 5 0 20775689 0 20775673 0 20775599 2 95565910 gt CENT WF 6 0 20775752 0 20775666 0 20775620 2 95565838 gt CENT WF 7 0 20775558 0 20775687 0 20775594 2 95566158 gt CENT WF 8 0 20775493 0 20775474 0 20775639 2 95566569 gt CENT Total Center 5 39761509 5 39761243 5 39760738 sum_spread 23 64529321 gt CENT SD DEI a ee Pe Sg ee ee eee gt CENT CG 59 ETT RRA ey ee gt CENT WF 1 1 14585349 1 14584696 1 14584386 2 85421846 gt CENT WF 2 1 55295615 1 55294970 1 14584792 2 85422167 gt CENT WF 3 1 55296133 1 14584610 1 55295139 2 85421070 gt CENT WF 4 1 14584053 1 55296761 1 55296391 2 85417080 gt CENT WF 5 0 20356211 0 20355857 0 20355600 2 85418933 gt CENT WF 6 0 20355119 0 20355008 0 20355192 2 85422458 gt CENT WF 7 0 20355306 0 20355395 0 20355905 2 85420611 gt CENT WF 8 0 20355603 0 20356000 0 20355520 2 85420117 gt CENT Total Center 5 39761571 5 39761281 5 39760730 sum_spread 22 83364282 gt CENT where the optimization method and step is indicated by starting with SD or CG Lines starting with WF show the center of each Wannier function with x y z coordinates in A unit and its spread in A The sum up of all the Wannier functions center and spread are given in the the line starting with Total Center 39 4 Examp
78. 1051 total oO OO N 4 00000 8 00000 509755704 372561098 372561019 372561127 372561051 down ideal neutral Decomposed Mulliken populations sum sum px Py pz sum sum sum sum sum sum sum sum sum over over over over over over over over over over over Up spin multiple 0 0 681752967 m 0 681752967 m mul 0 681752967 0 0 609349992 0 0 609302752 0 0 609349993 m 1 828002737 m mul 1 828002737 Up spin multiple 0 0 372561098 m 0 372561098 m mul 0 372561098 Up spin multiple 0 0 372561019 0 372561019 m mul 0 372561019 m Up spin multiple 0 0 372561127 0 372561127 m mul 0 372561127 m Up spin multiple 0 0 372561051 m 0 372561051 Down spin 681752967 681752967 681752967 609349992 609302752 609349993 828002737 828002737 Fr OO OOO OC CO Down spin 0 372561098 0 372561098 0 372561098 Down spin 0 372561019 0 372561019 0 372561019 Down spin 0 372561127 0 372561127 0 372561127 Down spin 0 372561051 0 372561051 17 O O O O yg 019511408 745122197 745122038 745122254 745122102 Sum 363505935 363505935 363505935 218699985 218605504 218699985 656005474 656005474 w w e FFP FP FP pp Sum 0 745122197 0 745122197 0 745122197 Sum 0 745122038 0 745122038 0 745122038 Sum 0 745122254 0 745122254 0 745122254 Sum 0 745122102 0 74
79. 11425 2000 I V Solovyev A I Liechtenstein K Terakura Phys Rev Lett 80 5758 K Knopfle L M Sandratskii and J Kubler J Phys Condens Matter 9 7095 1997 I S Dhillon and B N Parlett SIAM J Matrix Anal Appl 25 858 2004 J J M Cuppen Numer Math 36 177 1981 M Gu and S C Eisenstat SIAM J Mat Anal Appl 16 172 1995 N Mazari and D Vanderbilt Phys Rev B 56 12 847 1997 I Souza N Marzari and D Vanderbilt Phys Rev B 65 035109 2001 T Ozaki Phys Rev B 82 075131 2010 M Otani and O Sugino Phys Rev B 73 115407 2006 O Sugino I Hamada M Otani Y Morikawa T Ikeshoji and Y Okamoto Surf Sci 601 5237 2007 M Otani I Hamada O Sugino Y Morioka Y Okamoto and T Ikeshoji J Phys Soc Jpn 77 024802 2008 T Ohwaki M Otani T Ikeshoji and T Ozaki J Chem Phys 136 134101 2012 G Henkelman and H Jonsson J Chem Phys 113 9978 2000 S Grimme J Comput Chem 27 1787 2006 http www wannier org http www fhi berlin mpg de th fhi98md Murn readme_murn html http www openmx square org http www netlib org lapack http www nongnu org xmakemol 192 92 93 94 95 96 97 http www nanotec es http www nanoworld jp synaf http act jst go jp http ccinfo ims ac jp nanogrid http www jst go jp http computics material jp index e html 193 Index 1DFFT EnergyCutoff 30 49
80. 2 the semi infiniteness of the leads is taken into account by using the surface Green function which allows us to treat the semi infiniteness without introducing any discretization Thus it would be better to use a large number of k points along the a axis to keep the consistency between the steps 1 and 2 with respect to treatment of the semi infiniteness of the a axis Also it is noted that the number of k points for the bc plane should be consistent in the steps 1 and 2 38 3 Step 2 The NEGF calculation A Setting up Lead Device Lead You can set up the regions Ly Co and Ry in the structural configuration shown in Fig 29 in the following way The geometrical structure of the central region Co is specified by the following keywords Atoms Number and Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Atoms Number 18 lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 3 000 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 18 C 28 500 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The geometrical structure of the left lead region Lo is specified by the following keywords Left LeadAtoms Number and LeftLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates LeftLeadAtoms Number 3 lt LeftLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 1 500 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 2 C 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 126 3 C 1 500 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 LeftLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The geometrical structure of the right lead region R is specified by the following keywords RightLeadAtoms Number and
81. 2 800 98672 82548 MD_iter 6 83 800 98672 82548 MD_iter 7 84 200 98672 82548 MD_iter 8 84 600 98824 82688 MD_iter 9 85 000 98824 82688 MD_iter 10 87 300 98824 82688 MD_iter 11 87 500 98824 82688 MD_iter 12 87 400 98824 82688 MD_iter 13 85 700 98824 82688 MD_iter 14 84 500 98824 82688 MD_iter 15 86 100 98824 82688 MD_iter 16 86 300 98824 82688 MD_iter 17 86 500 98824 82688 MD_iter 18 86 400 98824 82688 MD_iter 19 86 500 98824 82688 MD_iter 20 87 500 98824 82688 2 ml_example Co4 U dat CPU VSZ kbyte RSS kbyte 180 MD_iter MD_iter MD_iter MD_iter MD_iter MD_iter aoa FF WN FB 92 84 700 85 85 85 84 800 700 300 100 000 50048 73628 73628 73628 98828 98828 181 15924 57476 57496 57496 82684 82684 54 Analysis of memory usage y y The memory usage can be found by analyzing files memory0 memoryl and memory where is the file name specified by the keyword System Name and the number in the file extension corresponds to process ID in the MPI parallelization The files are output by setting the keyword memory usage fileout as memory usage fileout on default off onloff As an example met memory0 is shown below Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_PAO_XV 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_PAO_RV 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_Atomic_Den 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_PAO_RWF 0 57 MBytes Memory SetPara
82. 3 of grids as n1 n2 n3 The k points in OpenMX are generated according to the Monkhorst Pack method 25 scf ProExpn VNA Switch on the keyword scf ProExpn VNA in case that the neutral atom potential VNA is expanded by projector operators 29 Otherwise turn off The default is ON scf ProExpn VNA ON ON OFF default ON In case that scf ProExpn VNA OFF the matrix elements for the VNA potential are evaluated by using the regular mesh in real space scf Mixing Type A mixing method of the electron density or the density matrix to generate an input electron density at the next SCF step is specified by keyword scf Mixing Type A simple mixing method Simple GR Pulay method Guaranteed Reduction Pulay method 39 RMM DIIS method 40 Kerker method 41 and RMM DIISK method 40 are available The simple mixing method used here is modified to accelerate the convergence referring to a convergence history When GR Pulay RMM DIIS Kerker or RMM DIISK is used the following recipes are helpful to obtain faster convergence of SCF calculations e Use a rather larger value for scf Mixing StartPulay Before starting the Pulay like mixing achieve a convergence at some level An appropriate value may be 10 to 30 for scf Mixing StartPulay e Use a rather larger value for scf ElectronicTemperature in case of metallic systems When scf ElectronicTemperature
83. 3 Uele 3 220120116009 iter 3 Gradient Norm 0 034308306321 Uele 3 223123238394 iter 4 Gradient Norm 0 025847573248 Uele 3 226177980300 iter 5 Gradient Norm 0 019106400842 Uele 3 229294858054 iter 6 Gradient Norm 0 013893824906 Uele 3 232489198284 iter 7 Gradient Norm 0 010499500005 Uele 3 235304178159 iter 8 Gradient Norm 0 008362635043 Uele 3 237652870812 iter 9 Gradient Norm 0 006959703539 Uele 3 239618540761 iter 10 Gradient Norm 0 005994816379 Uele 3 241268535418 iter 11 Gradient Norm 0 005298095979 Uele 3 242657118263 iter 12 Gradient Norm 0 003059655878 Uele 3 250892948269 iter 13 Gradient Norm 0 001390201488 Uele 3 255123241210 iter 14 Gradient Norm 0 000780925380 Uele 3 255179362845 iter 15 Gradient Norm 0 000726631072 Uele 3 255263012792 iter 16 Gradient Norm 0 000390930576 Uele 3 250873416989 iter 17 Gradient Norm 0 000280785975 Uele 3 250333677139 iter 18 Gradient Norm 0 000200668585 Uele 3 252345643243 iter 19 Gradient Norm 0 000240367596 Uele 3 254238199726 iter 20 Gradient Norm 0 000081974594 Uele 3 258146794679 In most cases 20 50 iterative steps are enough to achieve a sufficient convergence The comparison between the primitive basis orbitals and the optimized orbitals in the total energy is given by Primitive basis orbitals Utot 7 992569945749 Hartree Optimized orbitals by the orbital optimization Utot 8 133746986502 Hartree We see that the sm
84. 4 96650 0 00000 Also it should be noted that it is difficult to achieve a self consistent field in the non collinear DFT more than the collinear DFT calculation since there are many minima having almost comparable energy in the spin orientation space while the constraint DFT is useful for such a case In the non collinear DFT the inclusion of spin orbit coupling is supported while it is not supported for the collinear DFT See also the Section Relativistic effects for the issue b Figure 25 Spin orientation in a a projected form on each atom and b a real space representation of a MnO molecule calculated by the non collinear DFT The figures were visualized by Display Forces in XCrySDen The input file is Mol_MnO_NC dat in the directory work 104 30 Relativistic effects Relativistic effects can be incorporated by fully relativistic and scalar relativistic pseudopotentials In the fully relativistic treatment the spin orbit coupling is included in addition to kinematic relativistic effects Darwin and mass velocity terms On the other hand the spin orbit coupling is averaged in the scalar relativistic treatment Although the scalar relativistic treatment can be incorporated in both the collinear and non collinear DFT calculations the fully relativistic treatment is supported for only the non collinear DFT in OpenMX 30 1 Fully relativistic The fully relativistic effects including the spin orbit c
85. 4944108 149 0 003677357735 0 002544970842 0 006610037555 0 004574771451 0 000950861169 0 000658076633 0 000000008855 O 000000005272 B File format of amn file This file structure is closely following that in Wannier90 87 The first line of the file is the description of the whole file Obviously the four numbers in the second line are the number Nwin of bands within the outer window the number of k points the number of target MLWFs and the number of spin component respectively Similarly the data blocks are written in loops The most outer loop is spin component and then k points target MLWFs and number of bands As described in the first line of this file In each block the first three integers are the band index the index of MLWFs and index of k points respectively The next are real and imaginary of that matrix element An example file generated by the input file Si dat is shown here Amn Fist line BANDNUM KPTNUM WANNUM spinsize Next is m n k 10 512 8 1 1 1 1 0 053943539299 0 000161703961 2 1 1 0 000525446164 0 000000008885 3 1 1 0 002498021589 0 000000084311 10 1 1 0 000000023582 0 000000000069 1 2 1 0 053943534952 0 000161703965 2 2 1 0 033382665372 0 000000493665 3 2 1 0 051189536188 0 000001480360 C File format of eigen file This file contains the eigenenergies and eigenstates at each k point The first line is the Fermi level of system The number of bands is indicate
86. 5 0 50 50 5 0 00 00 0 Lg 15 0 00 00 0 1 01 00 0 gX Band kpath gt The beginning of the description must be lt Band kpath and the last of the description must be Band kpath gt The number of lines should be consistent with Band Nkpath The first column is the number of grids at which eigenvalues are evaluated on the path The following nl n2 n3 and n1 n2 n3 spanned by the reciprocal lattice vectors specifies the starting and ending k points of the path in the first Brillouin zone If Band KPath UnitCell is found the reciprocal lat tice vectors for the calculation of the band dispersion are calculated by the unit vectors specified in Band KPath UnitCell If Band KPath UnitCell is not found the reciprocal lattice vectors which 35 are calculated by the unit vectors specified in Atoms Unit Vectors is employed for the calculation of the band dispersion The final two alphabets give the name of the starting and ending k points of the path Restarting scf restart If you want to restart the SCF calculation using a previous file _rst which should be generated in the previous calculation then set the keyword scf restart to ON Output of molecular orbitals MOs MO fileout If you want to output molecular orbitals MOs to files then set the keyword MO fileout to ON num HOMOs The keyword num HOMOs gives the number of the highest occupied molecular orbi
87. 5122102 4 00000 8 00000 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 Diff 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 000000000 O O OO OO oO O Diff 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 Diff 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 Diff 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 Diff 0 000000000 0 000000000 sum over mtmul 0 372561051 0 372561051 0 745122102 FEOF ROKR SII IK EEEE ooo II kkk k Dipole moment Debye FEOF KORO ORR I I IR AK KKK KKK 2K FK FK FK K K K K dl RR K K K K 2K 2K FK ala FK FK K K K Rd FK FK FK K FK K K K 2K 2K dll FK FK FK ak ok O 000000000 Absolute D 0 00000071 Dx Dy Dz Total 0 00000046 0 00000000 0 00000054 Core 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 Electron 0 00000046 0 00000000 0 00000054 Back ground 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 FEAF I II IK IK FEAR I I I AK xyz coordinates Ang and forces Hartree Bohr FEOF BORO RRA II IK IK KKK K K K FK 2K FK FK K K K K dl K K K K K K 2K 2K FK al FK K dl Rd FK FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK ok OK ak ok lt coordinates forces 5 1 C 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 000000000327 0 000 2 H 0 88998 0 62931 0 00000 0 064883705001 0 045 3 H 0 00000 0 62931 0 88998 0 000000043463 0 045 4 H 0 00000 0 62931 0 88998 0 000000045939 0 045 5 H 0 88998 0 62931 0 00000 0 064883635459 0 045 coordinates forces gt EEEE K k K Kk K Kk dd dd
88. 809013 3 5933 180 0000 pz 1 O 000362989 90 0000 251 7994 sum over m O 003683170 11 3678 251 7994 d3z 2 r 2 0 0 043435663 90 0000 224 2874 dx 2 y 2 0 0 066105902 24 3591 229 7056 dxy 0 0 361874370 80 4206 50 6465 dxz 0 0 397108491 144 2572 12 7324 107 dyz 0 0 427070801 138 9995 100 0151 sum over m 0 776513038 132 4577 51 6984 d3z72 r72 1 0 000144144 90 0000 196 4795 dx 2 y72 1 0 000270422 31 2673 224 0799 dxy 1 0 003006770 85 5910 50 2117 dxz 1 0 002952926 139 3539 4 1301 dyz 1 0 003222374 134 0513 95 9246 sum over m 0 006795789 126 2536 52 1993 f5z 2 3r 2 0 0 001903274 90 0000 33 4663 f5xz 2 xr 2 0 0 005186342 14 5594 118 0868 f5yz 2 yr72 0 0 005258572 17 3323 35 0807 fzx 2 zy 2 0 0 005477755 29 3372 224 9067 fxyz 0 0 004851020 10 1407 249 0607 x 3 3 xy72 0 0 002029489 84 1842 81 2087 f3yx 2 y73 0 0 001611593 82 6686 176 3172 sum over m 0 020307129 9 9551 249 3739 As shown in Table 4 OpenMX gives a good agreement for both the spin and orbital magnetic moments of a series of 3d transition metal oxides with other calculation results However it is noted that the absolute value of orbital magnetic moment seems to be significantly influenced by calculation conditions such as basis functions and on site U in the LDA U method while the spin magnetic moment is relatively insensitive to the calculation conditions and that a rather rich basis set including polarization functions will be needed for convergent calculations of
89. C5 0 s2p1 C_PBE13 Definition of Atomic Species gt where an abbreviation H5 0 s2p1 of the basis function is introduced H5 0 stands for the file name of the PAO functions without the file extension which must exist in a directory specified by the keyword DATA PATH e g DFT_DATA13 PAO and 5 0 implies the cutoff radius of the PAO functions Also s2p1 means that two s state radial functions and one p state radial function stored in the file are used In this case totally five PAO basis functions 2x1 1x3 5 are assigned for H Since optimized basis functions are available on the web site http www openmx square org as the database Ver 2013 We recommend for general users to use these optimized basis functions But for experts both the primitive and optimized PAO functions are explained in the subsequent sections 9 2 Primitive basis functions The primitive basis functions are generated by ADPACK and they are the ground and exited states of a pseudo atom with a confinement pseudopotential 28 as shown in Fig 1 The functions are numerical table function stored in a file of which file extension is pao You will see that the ground state is nodeless and the first exited state has one node and the number of nodes increases in the further excited states When you use the primitive PAO functions as basis set the one particle Kohn Sham functions are expressed by the linear combination of the pseudo atomic type basis functions w
90. Dis Conv Criterion is applied to Delta T CONV Monitor the optimization of the gauge dependent part of the spread function the second step of optimization grep CONV stdout std Opt Step Mode of Gradient d_Omega_in_steps d_Omega in Angs 2 gt CONV SD 1 6 52434844E 01 5 41612774E 04 5 41340331E 04 gt CONV SD 2 6 51123660E 01 5 40524307E 04 5 40253165E 04 gt CONV SD 200 4 77499752E 01 3 96392019E 04 3 96271308E 04 gt CONV Opt Step Mode of Gradient d_Omega Angs 2 gt CONV CG 1 8 61043764E 01 3 24716990E 01 gt CONV CG 58 1 67083857E 12 5 37225101E 13 gt CONV CG 59 5 44431651E 13 1 98972260E 13 gt CONV JO OR OK OR OR OK oo kkk kkk lt gt CONV CONVERGENCE ACHIEVED gt CONV BOOK OK RK ORK OK kkk kkk lt gt CONV CONVERGENCE ACHIEVED gt SPRD where Opt Step and Modu of Gradient are the optimization step in either SD or CG method and the modulus of gradient of the spread function The difference between two neighboring steps in the gauge dependent spread functions is calculated in two different way in the SD method giving d_Omega in steps and d_Omega d_Omega_in_steps is given by dQ e G k where e is the step length G is the gradient of the spread function The details of the equation can be found in Ref 78 On the other hand d_Omega is give
91. Electric Field 29 95 scf ElectronicTemperature 27 52 scf energycutoff 27 50 92 105 185 scf ExtCharge History 57 scf fixed grid 51 scf Hubbard Occupation 27 109 scf Hubbard U 26 109 scf Init Mixing Weight 28 52 scf Kerker factor 29 52 54 scf Kgrid 28 68 105 126 scf Max Mixing Weight 28 52 54 scf maxlter 27 scf Min Mixing Weight 28 52 scf Mixing EveryPulay 29 52 54 scf Mixing History 29 52 54 scf Mixing StartPulay 29 52 scf Mixing Type 28 52 scf NC Mag Field Orbital 115 scf NC Mag Field Spin 114 scf NC Zeeman Orbital 115 scf NC Zeeman Spin 114 scf Ngrid 27 50 51 scf Npoles ON2 154 scf partialCoreCorrection 26 scf ProExpn VNA 28 185 scf restart 36 56 scf SpinOrbit Coupling 29 105 106 scf SpinPolarization 26 40 41 103 scf system charge 29 45 96 scf XcType 26 41 System CurrrentDir 23 System Name 23 56 62 63 107 144 Voronoi charge 37 100 Wannier Dis Conv Criterion 143 146 Wannier Dis Mixing Para 143 Wannier Dis SCF Max Steps 143 Wannier Func Calc 139 Wannier Func Num 139 Wannier Function Plot 144 Wannier Function Plot SuperCells 144 Wannier Initial Guess 140 Wannier Initial Projectors Unit 141 Wannier Initial Projectos 141 Wannier Inner Window Bottom 139 Wannier Inner Window Top 139 Wannier Interpolated Bands 144 Wannier Kgrid 141 Wannier MaxShells 141 Wannier Minimizing Conv Criterion 143 147 Wannier Minimizing Max St
92. F steps specified by NEGF scf Iter Band the conventional diagonalization method is used and then onward the solver is switched from the conventional method to the NEGF method The default is 6 NEGF bias voltage 0 0 default 0 0 eV The source drain bias voltage applied to the left and right leads is specified by the keyword NEGF bias voltage in units of eV corresponding to Volt Noting that only the difference between applied bias voltages has physical meaning you only have to give a single value as the source drain bias voltage NEGF bias neq im energy 0 01 default 0 01 eV NEGF bias neq energy step 0 02 default 0 02 eV When a finite source drain bias voltage is applied a part of the density matrix is contributed by the non equilibrium Green function Since the non equilibrium Green function is not analytic in general in the complex plane the contour integration method used for the equilibrium Green function cannot be applied Thus in the current implementation the non equilibrium Green function is evaluated on the real axis with a small imaginary part using a simple rectangular quadrature scheme Then the imaginary part is given by the keyword NEGF bias neq im energy and the step width is given by the keyword NEGF bias neq energy step in units of eV In most cases the default values are sufficient while the detailed analysis of the convergence property can be found in Ref 54 How many energy points
93. K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K K K K FK FK FK FK FK FK 3K K K K K 2K 2K 2K FK FK FK 2K OK K ak KKK K K 2 Rd K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K FK FK FK FK FK FK K K K FK FK FK FK FK FK FK FK K K K K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K FK OK OK ak ok Chemical Potential Hartree O 000000000000 Eigenvalues Hartree for SCF KS eq Number of States HOMO 4 Eigenvalues 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 KKK K K K 2 FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2 dal FK K dl Rd FK FK FK K FK K K K K 2K 2K doll FK FK ok ak ok ARO FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K FK K K K FK FK FK FK FK K FK K K K K K 2K 2K 2K FK FK OK OK K ak KKK K K 2 RR K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K K K FK FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K 2K 2K 2K FK FK 2K ok K ok KKK KK 2 RR K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K 2K FK FK FK 2K K K K FK FK FK FK FK FK K 2 K K K dd 2K 2K 2K FK 2K 2K K K Total spin S Up spin 69897190537228 41522646150979 41522645534084 41521772830844 21218282298348 21218282358344 21227055734372 24742493684297 O 00000000000000 8 00000000000000 Down spin 69897190537228 41522646150979 41522645534084 41521772830844 21218282298348 21218282358344 21227055734372 24742493684297 Mulliken populations O 000000000000 Up spin Down spin Sum 16 Diff Sum of MulP up or WN e coe ea 2 509755704 0 372561098 0 372561019 0 372561127 0 37256
94. NODOO COON N aoannnoonanw noo annnoonwnan n noo MD Type NEB The number of images in the path is given by MD NEB Number Images 8 default 10 where the two terminals are excluded from the number of images The spring constant is given by MD NEB Spring Const 0 1 default 0 1 hartee borh 2 In most cases the obtained path does not largely depend on the value The optimization of MEP is performed by a hybrid DIIS BFGS scheme which is controlled by the following keywords MD Opt DIIS History 4 default 7 MD Opt StartDIIS 10 default 5 MD maxIter 100 default 1 MD Opt criterion 1 0e 4 default 1 0e 4 Hartree Bohr The specification of these keywords are the same as for the geometry optimization So see the section Geometry optimization in the manual for the details Also it is also possible to fix the atomic position by the keyword MD Fixed XYZ Execution of the NEB calculation One can perform the NEB calculation with the input file C2H4_NEB dat by mpirun np 16 openmx C2H4_NEB dat If the calculation is successfully completed more than 24 files will be generated Some of them are listed below c2h4 neb opt history of optimization for finding MEP c2h4 neb ene total energy of each image c2h4 neb xyz atomic coordinates of each image in XYZ format C2H4_NEB dat input file for restarting C2H4_NBE dat_0 input file for the precursor C2H4_NBE dat_1 input file for the image 1 C2H4_NBE dat_2 input fil
95. NaCl bulk via the macroscopic polarization 1 SCF calculation First perform a conventional SCF calculation using an input file NaCl dat in the directory work Then the following keyword HS fileout should be switched on HS fileout on onloff default off When the calculation is completed normally then you can find an output file nacl scfout in the directory work 2 Calculation of macroscopic polarization The macroscopic polarization is calculated by a post processing code polB of which input data is nacl scfout In the directory source compile as follows make polB When the compile is completed normally then you can find an executable file polB in the directory work Then move to the directory work and perform as follows polB nacl scfout or polB nacl scfout lt in gt out In the latter case the file in contains the following ingredients 999 111 In the former case you will be interactively asked from the program as follows FEA AAA K K K K K 2K 2K aK 2k ICI 3K I I I 3K I K 1 21 K aK 2K 2K 2K 2K K 2K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K K 3K K K 2K 2K K FEAR CCCI I I I I I 3K K K 21 21 21 21 25 21 21 21 21 21 21 25 5 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K A 3K 3K K K K K K polB code for calculating the electric polarization of bulk systems Copyright C 2006 2007 Fumiyuki Ishii and Taisuke Ozaki This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it un
96. O Fa AT figs bg A v6 V2 v3 v6 v2 v3 142 Wannier MaxShells 12 default value is 12 Wannier Kgrid 8 8 8 no default value Minimizing spread of WF For entangled band case 79 two steps are needed to find the MLWFs The first step is to minimize the gauge invariant part of spread function by disentangling the non isolated bands The second step is the same as isolated band case 78 The gauge dependent part is optimized by unitary transformation of the selected Bloch wave functions according to the gradient of spread function For the first step three parameters are used to control the self consistence loop They are Wannier Dis SCF Max Steps Wannier Dis Conv Criterion and Wannier Dis Mixing Para They are the maximum number of SCF loops the convergence criterion and the parameter to control the mixing of input and output subspace projectors respectively Wannier Dis SCF Max Steps 2000 default 200 Wannier Dis Conv Criterion le 12 default 1e 8 Wannier Dis Mixing Para 0 5 default value is 0 5 For the second step three minimization methods are available One is a steepest decent SD method and the second one is a conjugate gradient CG method The third one is a hybrid method which uses the SD method firstly and then switches to the CG method The keyword Wan nier Minimizing Scheme indicates which method to be used 0 1 and 2 mean the simple SD method the CG method and hybrid metho
97. O O O O OO 1 0024 1671 9856 0010 0010 0010 0067 0068 0067 0002 0004 0004 0001 0004 0023 0040 0091 0 0189 0 0091 0952 0002 2 0 0026 0 0005 0 0030 0 0004 0 0006 0 0012 0 0023 0 0041 0 0070 0 0781 0 0105 0 0009 0 0008 0 0004 0 9875 0 1326 0 0233 0 0180 0 0110 10 0 2456 0 9859 3 0 0026 0 0006 0 0039 0 0011 0 0008 0 0001 0 0066 0 0053 0 0005 0 0105 0 0781 0 0002 0 0010 0 0008 0 1327 0 9875 0 0052 0 0233 0 0212 11 0 9902 0 0036 4 0 0038 0 0 0040 0 0 0227 0 0 0131 0 0 0000 0 0130 0 0131 0 0 0792 0 0 0801 0 0 0792 0 0 0023 0002 0 0 0004 0 0 0246 0 0 0269 0 0 0246 0 0033 0 0 0056 0 0 7055 0 5578 0 5964 0 0 5578 0 12 0 9974 0 0 0001 0 5 0051 0000 0000 0004 0004 0161 0000 0161 0013 0421 0000 0 0420 0262 0151 0003 7052 13 9975 0000 6 0 0051 0 0005 0 0072 0 0001 0 0009 0 0001 0 0123 0 0162 0 0123 0 0014 0 0024 0 0251 0 0478 0 0251 0 0159 0 0275 0 4249 0 7958 0 4255 14 1 0060 0 0000 T 0 0888 0 0124 0 0066 0 0261 0 0271 0 0261 0 5594 0 5797 0 5594 0 0002 0 0003 0 0794 0 0795 0 0794 0 0001 0 0002 0 0749 0 0748 0 0749 15 1 0060 0 0000 enhancing explicitly the orbital polarization is available by the following switch For col
98. ONOL Charge a nieron che be acto ge Ghee Se Bee Ae eee a wets ine Gre oot ae BS 28 3 Electro static potential fitting 2 2 0 0 0 a 29 Non collinear DFT 30 Relativistic effects 30 1 Fully relativistic o 000000222 a ee a eee ae a a ee 30 2 Scalar relativistic treatment 31 Orbital magnetic moment 32 LDA U 33 Constraint DFT for non collinear spin orientation 34 Zeeman terms 34 1 Zeeman term for spin magnetic moment o 34 2 Zeeman term for orbital magnetic moment 0 0 000002 ee eee 35 Macroscopic polarization by Berry s phase 36 Exchange coupling parameter 37 Optical conductivity 38 Electric transport calculations E A eae od tet ETP hE 38 2 Step 1 The calculations for leads 2 e e 38 3 Step 2 The NEGF calculation 0 2 0 0 02 e 38 4 Step 3 The transmission and current 2 a 38 5 Periodic system under zero bias a a 38 6 Interpolation of the effect by the bias voltage o 38 7 Parallelization of NEGF e 90 91 91 91 95 96 97 98 103 105 105 106 107 109 113 114 114 114 116 120 122 38 8 NEGF method for the non collinear DFT 136 38 9 Examples gore e424 Pea ENG Se ee Dee a a ee ee eS 137 38 10 Automatic running test of NEGF 2 2 0 0 0 e 138 39 Maximally Localized Wannier Function 139 39 1 General si AD Bod ese AA o ee oS e E pe AAA 139 39 2 Ana
99. Other options 2 6 1 Dblaswrap and 1177 In some environment adding two options Dblaswrap and 1177 is required while we do not fully understand why such a dependency exists In such a case add two options for CC FC and LIB as follows 10 CC mpicc openmp 03 Dblaswrap I usr local include FC LIB mpif90 mp openmp Dblaswrap I usr local include L usr local lib lfftw3 llapack lblas lg2c 1177 static 2 6 2 Df 77 Df77_ Df77__ DF77 DF77_ DF77__ When lapack and blas libraries are linked the specification of routines could depend on the machine environment The variation could be capital or small letter or with or without of the underscore To choose a proper name of lapack and blas routines on your computer environment you can specify an option by Df77 Df77_ Df77__ DF77 DF77_ or DF77__ If the capital letter is needed in calling the lapack routines then choose F and choose a type of the underscore by none or _ The default set is Df77_ 2 6 3 Dnosse Since the routine Krylov c for the O N Krylov subspace method has been optimized using Streaming SIMD Extensions SSE the code will be compiled including SSE on default compilation If your processors do not support SSE then include Dnosse as compilation option for CC 2 6 4 Dkcomp For SPARC processors developed by FUJITSU Ltd include Dkcomp as compilation option for CC and FC 2 7 Platforms So far we have c
100. P MPI version To generate the OpenMP MPI hybrid version all you have to do is to include a compiler option for OpenMP parallelization for CC and FC in makefile in the directory source To proceed the installation of the OpenMP MPI version move to the directory source and specify CC FC and LIB in makefile for example as follows For icc CC mpicc openmp 03 I usr local include FC mpif90 openmp 03 I usr local include LIB L usr local lib 1fftw3 llapack lblas lg2c static For pgcc cc mpicc mp 03 I usr local include FC mpif90 mp 03 I usr local include LIB L usr local lib 1fftw3 llapack lblas lg2c static The compiler option for OpenMP depends on compiler Also it is noted that older versions of icc and pgcc do not support the compiler option for OpenMP After specifying CC FC and LIB appropriately then install as follows make install When the compilation is completed normally then you can find the executable file openmx in the directory work To make the execution of OpenMX efficient you can change a compiler and compile options appropriate for your computer environment which can generate an optimized executable file 2 5 FFTW3 OpenMX Ver 3 7 supports only FFTW3 while older versions up to Ver 3 6 also support FF TW2 as well as FFTW3 Then you may link FFTW3 in your makefile as follows LIB L usr local lib fftw3 llapack lblas lg2c static 2 6
101. RK FK dd dd 2k FK 2k K 2k K 2k K 2 K ok FEKK KK k K Kk 2K Kk 2K Kk 2K KK 2k dd dd FKK K FK FK K FK FKK FK FKK FK FK K K K K ees K ok Fractional coordinates of the final structure EEEE EEE EE K Ek kkk k Kk k kk k kk k Kk k kkk kkk K Kk KKK k Kk 2k KK k KK 2k K Kk K KKK K kK 2 2 FK FK FK K K K K K 2K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2 FK FK FK FK K K K K FK FK FK FK FK FK K FK K K K K 2K 2K ok K ok oF UU N e Ha a ea e a O O 00000000000000 0 91100190000000 O 00000000000000 O 00000000000000 0 08899810000000 O 00000000000000 0 93706880000000 0 06293120000000 0 06293120000000 0 93706880000000 0 00000000000000 0 00000000000000 0 91100190000000 0 08899810000000 0 00000000000000 KKK KK K 2K FK FK FK K K K K Rd K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K dl Rd FK FK FK K FK K K K K 2K 2K dl 2 FK ok ak ok 18 FEA AAAI 3K K K K K K K 2K 2K ak EC 3K 3K 3K 3K A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K 21 K K K K K K 5 2 FF 3K 3K 2K 2K Computational Time second FEA 3K K K K K aK K aK gt k CACC A A A A 3K 3K K K K K 21 K 21 21 K K K 1 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K KKK KK 2 2K FK FK FK K K K K K FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2 FK FK FK FK FK K K K FK FK 2 FK FK FK K 3K K K K dd 2K 2K FK FK 2K ok K K Elapsed Time 11 725 Min_ID Min_Time Max_ID Max_Time Total Computational Time 0 11 725 0 11 725 readfile 0 8 987 0 8 987 truncation 0 0 155 0 0 155 MD_pac 0 0 000 0 0 000 OutData 0 0 452 0 0 452 DFT 0 2 130 0 2 130 Rx I
102. RightLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates RightLeadAtoms Number 3 lt RightLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 30 000 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 2 C 31 500 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 3 C 33 000 0 000 0 000 2 0 2 0 RightLeadAtoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt This is the case of carbon chain which is demonstrated in the previous subsection The central region Co is formed by 18 carbon atoms and the left and right regions Ly and Ry contains three carbon atoms respectively where every bond length is 1 5 A Following the geometrical specification of device and leads OpenMX will construct an extended central region C Lo Co Ro as shown in Fig 29 The Green function for the extended central region C is self consistently determined in order to take account of relaxation of electronic structure around the interface between the central region Co and the region Lo Ro In addition we impose two conditions so that the central Green function can be calculated in the NEGF method 54 1 The localized basis orbitals in the region Co overlap with those in the regions Lg and Ro but do not overlap with those in the regions L and Rj 2 The localized basis orbitals in the L R region has no overlap with basis orbitals in the cells beyond the nearest neighboring cells L _1 R 1 and L441 Ri 1 In our implementation the basis functions are strictly localized in real space because of the generation of basis orbitals by a confinement scheme 28 29 Therefore
103. T b EE EF 160 EE eros L RF EE Dis 120 801 40 0 SiC Diamond BzCg TiO V05 NaCl surface Figure 9 The number of optimization steps to achieve the maximum force of below 3 x 1074 Hartree Bohr for a molecular systems and b bulk systems using four kinds of optimization methods 14 3 Constrained relaxation It is possible to optimize geometrical structures with a constraint in which atoms can be fixed in the initial position The constraint can be applied separately to the x y and z coordinates to the initial atomic position in your input file by the following keyword MD Fixed XYZ lt MD Fixed XYZ 1 111 2 100 MD Fixed XYZ gt The example is for a system consisting of two atoms If you have N atoms then you have to provide N rows in this specification The 1st column is the same sequential number to specify atom as in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates The 2nd 3rd and 4th columns are 60 flags for the x y and z coordinates respectively 1 means that the coordinate is fixed and 0 relaxed In the above example the x y and z coordinates of the atom 1 are fixed and only the x coordinate of the atom 2 is fixed The default setting is that all the coordinates are relaxed The fixing of atomic positions are valid for all the geometry optimizers and molecular dynamics schemes The constrained relaxation may be useful for a refinement of the local struct
104. T 40 a ao y fi ror 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 D Number of SCF iterations O 5 10 r 1 E eee ee O Z 10 _3 Simple 10 F e RMM DIIS GR Pulay Kerker aa 108 RMM DIISK Y APR L L L L L L 1 L 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Number of SCF iterations Figure 6 Convergence of the norm of residual density matrix or charge density in the SCF calculations using five mixing schemes of a a sialic acid molecule b a Pt13 cluster and c a Ptg3 cluster The input files are SialicAcid dat Pt13 dat and Pt63 dat in the directory work 53 The residual vectors in the Pulay type mixing schemes tend to become linearly dependent on each other as the mixing steps accumulate and the linear dependence among the residual vectors makes the convergence difficult A way of avoiding the linear dependence is to do the Pulay type mixing occasionally during the Kerker mixing With this prescription you can specify the frequency using the keyword scf Mixing EveryPulay For example in case of scf Mixing EveryPulay 5 the Pulay mixing is made at every five SCF iterations while the Kerker type mixing is used at the other steps scf Mixing EveryPulay 1 corresponds to the conventional Pulay type mixing It is noted that the keyword scf Mixing EveryPulay is supported for only RMM DIISK and the default value is 1 The above prescription works in some cases But
105. User s manual of OpenMX Ver 3 7 Contributors T Ozaki JAIST H Kino NIMS J Yu SNU M J Han KAIST M Ohfuchi Fujitsu Labs F Ishii Kanazawa Univ K Sawada Univ of Tokyo Y Kubota Kanazawa Univ T Ohwaki NISSAN Research Center H Weng CAS M Toyoda Osaka Univ Y Okuno FUJIFILM R Perez UAM P P Bell UAM T V T Duy Univ of Tokyo Yang Xiao NUAA A M Ito NIFS K Terakura AIST May 24 2013 Contents 1 About OpenMX 2 Installation 2 1 Including libraries A A oh Ao A A A th See 22 Serial version 2 232408 ase ee a A ee eo aot a i 2 39 MPI Version 2 4 OpenMP MPI version a e A AAA o a DO OR Wt paara A A a di AA O A A aks 2 6 Other Options se in e Ge ok fe Soe es li Be aa I aio nl poe ede Gd da an ee a 2 6 1 Dblaswrap and ITT e eenn a 200 002 a e a E ee 2 6 2 Df77 Df77_ Df77_ DF77 DF77_ DF77_ DOS DA A dele te Ee Maal al 2 6 44 EDECOMP 2 2 dade ent Sh ok e de A Ma O ke 2 7 E Re ey ee a es 2i8 Tips for installation bw eck ar ac Page Wel ec ce eae 3 Test calculation 4 Automatic running test 5 Automatic running test with large scale systems 6 Input file 6 1 An example methane molecule 2 2 0 0 000 eee ee 6 2 Keywords ta eke A Boke Die A ae Bet Soke Re 7 Output files 8 Functional 9 Basis sets OMI General Assets A se aN ee tae Dat ene ae te ie Soo aegis ath ie Ga ta eS RT NE 9 2 Primitive basis functions 9 3 Optimized
106. VE molecular dynamics A constant energy molecular dynamics simulation is performed by the following keyword MD Type MD Type NVE NOMD Opt NVE NVT_VS NVT_VS2 NVT_NH means Sys Calculated quantities at every MD step are stored in an output file ene where tem Name Although you can find the details in iterout c in the directory source several quantities are summarized for your convenience as follows MD step 2 MD time 14 kinetic energy of nuclear motion Ukc Hartree 15 DFT total energy Utot Hartree 16 Utot Ukc Hartree 17 Fermi energy Hartree which means that the first and second columns correspond to MD step and MD time and so on 15 2 NVT molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling A velocity scaling scheme 17 is supported to perform NVT ensemble molecular dynamics simulation by the following keyword MD Type NVT_VS NOMD Opt NVE NVT_VS NVT_VS2 NVT_NH Then in this NVT molecular dynamics the temperature for nuclear motion can be controlled by lt MD TempControl 3 100 2 1000 0 0 0 400 10 700 0 0 4 700 40 500 0 0 7 MD TempControl gt The beginning of the description must be lt MD TempControl and the last of the description must be MD TempControl gt The first number 3 gives the number of the following lines to control the temperature In this case you can see that there are three lines Following the number 3 in the consecutive lines the first c
107. _DFT Spe_RF_Bessel 1 03 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_VPS_XV 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_VPS_RV 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_Vna 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_VH_Atom 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_Atomic_PCC 0 01 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_VNL 0 11 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_VNLE 0 00 MBytes Memory SetPara_DFT Spe_VPS_List 0 00 MBytes Memory Poisson array0 4 00 MBytes Memory Poisson arrayl 4 00 MBytes Memory Poisson request_send 0 00 MBytes Memory Poisson stat_send 0 00 MBytes Memory Poisson request_recv 0 00 MBytes Memory Poisson stat_recv 0 00 MBytes Memory Force Hx 0 00 MBytes Memory Force Hy 0 00 MBytes Memory Force Hz 0 00 MBytes Memory Force CDMO 0 00 MBytes Memory Data_Grid_Copy_B2C_1 Work_Array_Snd_Grid_B2C 0 72 MBytes Memory Data_Grid_Copy_B2C_1 Work_Array_Rcv_Grid_B2C 0 72 MBytes Memory total 256 99 MBytes The file can be obtained by setting the keyword in the input file Methane dat and performing a single process Note that memory usages for most of arrays are listed in the file but the list is not complete 182 55 Output of large sized files in binary mode Large scale calculations produce large sized files in text mode such as cube files The IO access to output such files can be very time consuming in machines of which IO access is not fast In such a case it is better to output those large sized files in binary mode The procedure is supported
108. a b ESM Il slab ESM o SSS zeu NN Figure 37 a Schematic view of a slab with semi infinite media ESMs ESM I and II are placed at cell boundaries x 0 and a a the length of the cell along x axis respectively b An example of a unit cell for a MD calculation of solid surface liquid interface model system with the ESM method The slab and ESMs are placed parallel to the y z plane 155 The a axis of the cell is perpendicular to the b c plane and is parallel to the x axis Two periodic boundary conditions are set in y and z axis directions ESMs are placed at the cell boundaries x 0 and a The origin of the x axis is set at the cell boundary A fractional coordinate for x axis is designated between 0 and 1 A calculation based on an ESM method can be performed by the following keyword ESM switch on3 off onl vivilv on2 mlvlm on3 vlvlm on4 0n2 EF ESM buffer range 4 5 default 10 0 ang where onl on2 on3 and on4 represent combinations of ESMs vacuum vacuum ideal metal ideal metal vacuum ideal metal and ideal metal ideal metal under an electric field respec tively The keyword ESM buffer range indicates the width of a exclusive region for atoms with ESM unit is A which is necessary in order to prevent overlaps between wave functions and ESM I ESM switch onl Both ESM I and II are semi infinite vacuum media In
109. abase Ver 2013 The optimized PAO functions are provided on the website http www openmx square org as the database Ver 2013 This should be the first choice by general users since they were generated by the orbital optimization method 28 and tested well through a series of benchmark calculations For most elements in the database Ver 2013 three systems are chosen as training sets of chemical environment and the PAO functions were optimized by the orbital optimization method for the chosen systems 28 Then those optimized ones are unified to form a single PAO file through a combination scheme of a subspace rotation method and Gram Schmidt orthogonalization Thus the optimized PAO functions 43 l o S oe Total Energy Hartree a a o o e o co 00 y D o o 1 40 1 32 1 24 Equilibrium Bond Length A vom a o 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Number of Bases per Atom Figure 2 Convergence properties of a the total energy and b the equilibrium bond length for a carbon dimer with respect to the cutoff radius and the number of basis functions have been already optimized for a set of different chemical environments which may increase the transferability of the optimized PAO functions In fact the series of benchmark calculations shown in the web site of the database are in good agreement with corresponding all electron calculations From the benchmark calculations one may find a proper
110. alculated results with the reference results which are stored in work wf_example The comparison absolute difference in the spread and Q functions is stored in a file runtestWF result in the directory work The reference results were calculated using a Xeon cluster machine If the difference is within last seven digits we may consider that the installation is successful 152 40 Numerically exact low order scaling method for diagonalization A numerically exact low order scaling method is supported for large scale calculations 80 The computational effort of the method scales as O N logN O N2 and O N7 3 for one two and three dimensional systems respectively where N is the number of basis functions Unlike O N methods developed so far the approach is a numerically exact alternative to conventional O N diagonalization schemes in spite of the low order scaling and can be applicable to not only insulating but also metallic systems in a single framework The well separated data structure is suitable for the massively parallel computation as shown in Fig 36 However the advantage of the method can be obtained only when a large number of CPU cores are used for parallelization since the prefactor of computational efforts can be large When you calculate low dimensional large scale systems using a large number of CPU cores the method can be a proper choice To choose the method for diagonzalization you can specify the
111. all but accurate basis set orbitals can be generated by the orbital optimization In Fig 14 we show the convergence properties of total energies for molecules and bulks as a function of the number of unoptimized and optimized orbitals implying that a remarkable convergent results are obtained using the optimized orbitals for all the systems In this illustration of a methane molecule the optimized radial orbitals are output to files C_1 pao and H_2 pao These output files C_1 pao and H_2 pao could be an input data for pseudo atomic orbitals as is This means that it is possible to perform a pre optimization of basis orbitals for systems you are interested in The pre optimization could be performed for smaller but chemically similar systems The following two options are available for the keyword orbitalOpt Method atoms in which basis obitals on each atom are fully optimized species in which basis obitals on each species are optimized 76 T T T T T T T T T T 7 75 T T T T T T T T T T T 5 45 J J Oe 7 801 Calle 5 46 Primitive 4 0 Primitive 4 S Optimized 7 85f Optimized 5 48 4 790l 4 5 49 fi L fi fi L fi L fi L 1 7 95 C 1 1 L fi L fi 1 fi 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 7 88 4 154 3 J E CH CaF 792l 154 4 I Primiti
112. anb which can be used in the calculation of the step 3 which means that you can skip the calculation of the step 2 38 6 Interpolation of the effect by the bias voltage Since for large scale systems it is very time consuming to perform the SCF calculation at each bias voltage an interpolation scheme is available to reduce the computational cost in the calculations by the NEGF method The interpolation scheme is performed in the following way i the SCF calculations are performed for a few bias voltages which are selected in the regime of the bias voltage of interest ii when the transmission and current are calculated linear interpolation is made for the Hamiltonian 133 0 5 0 14 0 4 c 0 12 0 3 2 0 1 i i 0 2 0 08 l 0 1 2 0 06 ll Ko E 0 04 0 02 H ds of VS 0 4 0 3 0 2 01 ca 3 ih d 1 02 93 0 4 05805 3 Ko E 0 iii l 0 5 0 4 93 0 2 01 0 O4 op a 4 o 03 04 05 kb c i O dos M 50 008 l M S a N i E 0 008 a il c E A ot fn Ui 0 5 0 4 93 0 2 a a r 0 2 0 3 0 4 0505 kb Figure 31 k resolved Transmission at the chemical potential for a the majority spin state of the parallel configuration b the minority spin state of the parallel configuration and c a spin state of the antiparallel configuration of Fe MgO Fe respectively For the calculations k points of 120 x 120 were used block elements H5 k o and Ae of the central scattering region and
113. and the corresponding mirror charges Figure 38 b indicates the change of the Hartree potential AVq corresponding to each condition indicated in Fig 38 a where the potential inside the Al Si 111 slab and the electric field between the slab and the ideal metal medium change according to the amount of the doped charge 158 42 Nudged elastic band NEB method 42 1 General To search a minimum energy path MEP in geometrical phase space connecting two stable structures a nudged elastic band NEB method based on Ref 85 is supported in OpenMX Ver 3 7 The detail of the implementation is summarized as follows e Calculation of tangents based on Eqs 8 11 in Ref 85 e Calculation of perpendicular forces based on Eq 4 in Ref 85 e Calculation of parallel forces based on Eq 12 in Ref 85 e Optimization method based on a hybrid DIIS BFGS optimizer In order to minimize user s efforts in using it the functionality of NEB has been realized as one of geometry optimizers with the following features e Easy to use e Hybrid OpenMP MPI parallelization e Initial path by the straight line or user s definition e Only three routines added 42 2 How to perform The NEB calculation is performed by the following three steps 1 Geometry optimization of a precursor 2 Geometry optimization of a product 3 Optimization of a minimum energy path MEP connecting the precursor and product where in the three calculations users
114. ary of outer window default value 0 0 To set these two windows covering interested bands it is usually to plot band structure and or density of states before the calculation of MLWFs If you want to restart the minimization of MLWFs by reading the overlap matrix elements from files the outer window should not be larger than that used for calculating the stored overlap matrix Either equal or smaller is allowed The inner window can be varied within the outer window as you like when the restart calculation is performed This would benefit the restarting calculation or checking the dependence of MLWFs on the size of both the windows For the restarting calculation please see also the section 7 Restart optimization without calculating overlap matrix Initial guess of MLWFs User can choose whether to use initial guess of target MLWFs or not by setting the keyword Wannier Initial Guess as on or off Default value is on which means we recommend user to use an initial guess to improve the convergence or avoid local minima during the minimization of spread function If the initial guess is required a set of local functions with the same number of target MLWF s should be defined Bloch wave functions inside the outer window will be projected on to them Therefore these local functions are also called as projectors The following steps are required to specify a projector A Define local functions for projectors Since t
115. at the edges of the neutral and electron doped nanotubes due to dangling bonds of edge regions PER i OKAN P a l E z VA l r F MA Y V Figure 23 Spin densities of a four hole doped b neutral and c four electron doped 5 5 carbon nanotubes with a finite length of 14 A The input file is Doped_NT dat in the directory work 96 26 Virtual atom with fractional nuclear charge It is possible to treat a virtual atom with fractional nuclear charge by using a pseudopotential with the corresponding fractional nuclear charge The pseudopotential for the virtual atom can be generated by ADPACK The relevant keywords in ADPACK are given by AtomSpecies 6 2 total electron 6 2 valence electron 4 2 lt occupied electrons 1 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 occupied electrons gt The above example is for a virtual atom on the way of carbon and nitrogen atoms Also it is noted that basis functions for the pseudopotential of the virtual atom must be generated for the virtual atom with the same fractional nuclear charge since the atomic charge density stored in pao is used to make the neutral atom potential As an illustration the DOS of C7 3No 2 calculated using the method is shown in Fig 24 The input file is DIAS VA dat which can be found in the directory work In the calculation one of eight carbon atoms in the unit cell was replaced by a virtual atom with an effective nuclear charge of 4 2 which
116. ates respectively In case of non collinear calculations a file FermiSurf bxs is generated It is noted that a large number of k points should be used in order to obtain a smooth Fermi surface As an example Fermi surfaces of the fec Ca bulk are shown in Fig 43 The input file used for the calculation is Cafcc_FS dat in the directory work a b Figure 43 Fermi surfaces of the fcc Ca bulk visualized by XCrySDen 61 Since two sorts of bands intersect with the Fermi energy chemical potential two Fermi surfaces are shown in a and b The input file used for the calculation is Cafcc_FS dat in the directory work 171 47 Analysis of difference in two Gaussian cube files A utility tool is provided to generate a Gaussian cube file which stores the difference between two Gaussian cube files for total charge density spin density and potentials If you analyze the difference between two states this tool would be useful 1 Compiling of diff_gcube c There is a file diff_ gcube c in the directory source Compile the file as follows gcc diff_gcube c lm o diff_gcube When the compile is completed normally then you can find an executable file diff_gcube in the directory source Please copy the executable file to the directory work 2 Calculation of the difference If you want to know the difference between two Gaussian cube files inputl cube and input2 cube
117. ay c TRAN_Calc_SurfGreen c dtime c MD_pac c TRAN_Calc_SurfGreen_Sanvito c Eff_Hub_Pot c Memory_Leak_test c TRAN_Check_Input c EigenBand_lapack c Merge_LogFile c TRAN_Check_Region c Eigen_lapack2 c mimic_sse c TRAN_Check_Region_Lead c Eigen_lapack c Mio_tester2 c TRAN_Credit c Eigen_PHH c Mio_tester c TRAN_Deallocate_Electrode_Grid c Eigen_PReHH c Mixing_DM c TRAN_Deallocate_RestartFile c elpal f90 mpao c TRAN_DFT c esp c mpi_multi_world2 c TRAN_DFT_Dosout c EulerAngle_Spin c mpi_multi_world c TRAN_DFT_NC c expao c mpi_non_blocking c TRAN_Distribute_Node c exx c Mulliken_Charge c TRAN_Input_std_Atoms c exx_debug c neb c TRAN_Input_std c exx_file_eri c neb_check c TranMain c exx_file_overlap c neb_run c TranMain_NC c exx_index c Nonlocal_Basis c TRAN_Output_HKS c exx_interface_openmx c Nonlocal_RadialF c TRAN_Output_HKS_Write_Grid c exx_log c Occupation_Number_LDA_U c TRAN_Output_Trans_HS c exx_rhox c openmx c TRAN_Poisson c exx_stepl c openmx_common c TRAN_Print c exx_step2 c Opt_Contraction c TRAN_Print_Grid c exx_vector c OpticalConductivityMain c TRAN_Read c exx_xc c Orbital_Moment c TRAN_RestartFile c File_CntCoes c DutData_Binary c TRAN_Set_CentOverlap c Find_CGrids c DutData c TRAN_Set_CentOverlap_NC c find_Emin0 c Output_CompTime c TRAN_Set_Electrode_Grid c find_Emin2 c outputfilel c TRAN_Set_IntegPath c find_Emin c Overlap_Band c TRAN_Set_MP c find_Emin_withS c Overlap_Cluster c TRAN_Set_SurfOverlap c Force c pdb2pao c TRAN_Set_SurfO
118. c moment switch on the keyword scf NC Zeeman Orbital The magnitude of the uniform magnetic field can be specified by the keyword scf NC Mag Field Orbital in units of Tesla Moreover we extend the scheme as a constraint scheme in which the direction of the magnetic field can be different from each atomic site atom by atom Then the direction of magnetic field for orbital magnetic moment can be controlled for example by the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 Sc 0 000 0 000 0 000 6 6 4 4 10 0 50 0 160 0 20 0 1 on 2 Sc 2 000 0 000 0 000 6 6 4 4 80 0 50 0 160 0 20 0 1 on Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The 10th and 11th columns give the Euler angles theta and phi in order to specify the magnetic field for orbital magnetic moment The 12th column is a switch to the constraint 1 means that the con straint is applied and 0 no constraint Since for each atomic site a different direction of the magnetic field can be applied this scheme provides a way of studying non collinear orbital configuration Also it is noted that the direction of magnetic field for orbital magnetic moment can be different from that for spin moment 115 35 Macroscopic polarization by Berry s phase The macroscopic electric polarization of a bulk system can be calculated based on the Berry phase formalism 12 As an example let us illustrate a calculation of a Born effective charge of Na in a
119. change correlation potential for down spin in a Gaussian cube format e grid The real space grids which are used numerical integrations and the solution of Poisson s equation If MO fileout 0ON and scf EigenvalueSolver Cluster the following files are also generated e homo0_0 cube homo0_1 cube The HOMOs are output in a Gaussian cube format The first number below homo means a spin state up 0 down 1 The second number specifies the eigenstates i e 0 1 and 2 correspond to HOMO HOMO 1 and HOMO 2 respectively e lumo0_0 cube lumo0_1 cube The LUMOs are output in a Gaussian cube format The first number below lumo means a spin state up 0 down 1 The second number specifies the eigenstates i e 0 1 and 2 correspond to LUMO LUMO 1 and LUMO 2 respectively If MO fileout ON and scf EigenvalueSolver Band the following files are also generated e homo0_0_0_r cube homol_0_1 r cube homo0_0_0_i cube homo1_0_1 i cube The HOMOs are output in a Gaussian cube format The first number below homo means the k point number which is specified by the keyword MO kpoint The second number is a spin state up 0 down 1 The third number specifies the eigenstates i e 0 1 and 2 correspond to HOMO HOMO 1 and HOMO 2 respectively The r and mean the real and imaginary parts of the wave function 39 e lumo0_0_0_r cube lumol_0_1_r cub
120. cients for up U and down D spins 1 U 2 U 3 U 4 U 5 U 6 U 0 69899 0 41525 0 41525 0 41524 0 21215 0 21215 1 COs 0 69137 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 O px 0 00000 0 10055 0 63544 0 00033 0 68649 1 00467 O py 0 00000 0 00028 0 00029 0 64331 0 00000 0 00001 O pz 0 00000 0 63544 0 10055 0 00023 1 00467 0 68649 2 HOs 0 12870 0 05604 0 35474 0 25425 0 59781 0 87489 3 HOs 0 12870 0 35475 0 05627 0 25420 0 87488 0 59781 4 HOs 0 12870 0 35497 0 05604 0 25393 0 87488 0 59781 5 HOs 0 12870 0 05626 0 35497 0 25388 0 59781 0 87488 7 U 8 U 0 21223 0 24739 1 COs 0 00000 1 90847 O px 0 00000 0 00000 O py 1 21683 0 00000 O pz 0 00000 0 00000 2 HOs 0 74926 0 76083 In bulk calculations if a keyword MO fileout is set in ON LCAO coefficients at k points which out For cluster calculations level of fileout should be 2 in order to output LCAO coefficients But for band calculations the relevant keyword is MO fileout rather than level of fileout are specified by the keyword MO kpoint are output into a file 98 28 Charge analysis Although it is a somewhat ambiguous issue to assign effective charge to each atom OpenMX provides three schemes Mulliken charge analysis Voronoi charge analysis and electro static potential ESP fitting method to analyze the charge state of each atom 28 1 Mulliken charge y The Mulliken charges are output in o
121. corresponds to a stoichiometric compound of C7 gNp 2 4 T T T T T re T T Spin up 3 L Spin down J A 2 o n gt SS 09 e f A O nye coa pl 2 L Pues 3 4 4 fi L fi fi i fi fi fi fi 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 Energy eV Figure 24 Density of states DOS of C7 8No 2 calculated with a pseudopotential of the virtual atom The input file used for the calculation is DIA8 VA dat which can be found in the directory work 97 27 LCAO coefficients It is possible to analyze LCAO coefficients in both the cluster and band calculations In the cluster calculation if a keyword level of fileout is set in 2 the LCAO coefficients are added into a file out As an example LCAO coefficients of Methane dat discussed in the Section Test calculation are shown below FEA 3k 3k 3k 3K AA K K K K K 2K 2K aK aK 2K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K A A A A 3K 3K K K I K K K K K K K K K 2 2 2 3K 3K 2K 2K FEA AAA K K K K aK K K K ak EC CC ACA A A A A 3K 3K K K K K 21 21 24 21 K 21 K K FE 2 2K 2K Eigenvalues Hartree and Eigenvectors for SCF KS eq FREI 3K K K K K K K K 2K ak 2K 2K 3K CC ACA A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K 21 21 21 K 21 K 21 5 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K KKK K K 2 2 FK FK FK K K K K Rd K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K 2 K Rd FK FK FK K K K K K dd 2K FK 2K FK 2K ok K ak Chemical Potential Hartree O 00000000000000 HOMO 4 LCAO coeffi
122. d respectively The step length for the SD method is set by the keyword Wannier Minimizing StepLength In the CG method a secant method is used to determine the optimized step length The maximum secant steps and initial step length is specified by Wannier Minimizing Secant Steps and Wannier Minimizing Secant StepLength re spectively The maximum number of minimization step and convergence criterion are controlled by Wannier Minimizing Max Steps and Wannier Minimizing Conv Criterion respectively Wannier Minimizing Scheme 2 default 0 O SD 1 CG 2 hybrid Wannier Minimizing StepLength 2 0 default 2 0 Wannier Minimizing Secant Steps 5 default 5 Wannier Minimizing Secant StepLength 2 0 default 2 0 Wannier Minimizing Conv Criterion le 12 default 1e 8 Wannier Minimizing Max Steps 200 default 200 In the hybrid minimization scheme SD and CG have the same number of maximum minimization steps as specified by Wannier Minimizing Max Steps Restarting optimization without calculating overlap matrix If the overlap matrix mix has been calculated and stored in a disk file the keyword Wan nier Readin Overlap Matrix can be set as on to restart generating MLWF without calculating mix again Wannier Readin Overlap Matrix off default is on 143 This can save the computational time since the calculation of overlap matrix is time consuming The code will read the overlap matrix as wel
123. d 11 defalut 1 1 NEGF bias voltage 0 0 default 0 0 eV NEGF bias neq im energy 0 01 default 0 01 eV NEGF bias neq energy step 0 02 default 0 02 eV An explanation for each keyword is given below NEGF filename hks 1 lead chain hks NEGF filename hks r lead chain hks 128 The files containing information of leads are specified by the above two keywords where NEGF filename hks 1 and NEGF filename hks r are for the left and right leads respectively NEGF Num Poles 100 defalut 150 The equilibrium density matrix is evaluated by a contour integration method 54 55 The number of poles used in the method is specified by the keyword NEGF Num Poles NEGF scf Kgrid 11 defalut 1 1 The numbers of k points to discretize the reciprocal vectors b and are specified by the keyword NEGF scf Kgrid Since no periodicity is assumed along the a axis you do not need to specify that for the a axis NEGF scf Iter Band 6 defalut 6 It would be better to use the conventional diagonalization method for a few SCF steps in the initial SCF iterations by assuming a periodicity along the a axis as well as b and c axes The procedure is effective to avoid an erratic charge distribution which is a serious problem in the self consistent NEGF method The number of first SCF steps for which the conventional diagonalization method is applied is controlled by the keyword NEGF scf Iter Band Up to and including the SC
124. d be set in 1 e Use a rather larger value for scf Mixing StartPulay Before starting the Pulay type mixing achieve a convergence at some level An appropriate value may be 10 to 30 for scf Mixing StartPulay e Use a rather larger value for scf ElectronicTemperature in case of metallic systems When scf ElectronicTemperature is small numerical instabilities appear often In addition the charge sloshing which comes from charge components with long wave length can be significantly suppressed by tuning Kerker s factor a by the keyword scf Kerker factor where Kerker s metric is defined by AB 418 y ia q q 52 lq WwW _ ____ _ 2 lal 4 do Q Qmin where Qmin is the q vector with the minimum magnitude except O vector A larger a significantly suppresses the charge sloshing but leads to slower convergence Since an optimum value depends on system you may tune an appropriate value for your system Furthermore the behavior of RMM DIISK can be controlled by the following keyword default Wl pa scf Mixing EveryPulay 5 Simple e RMM DIIS GR Pulay 10 Kerker e RMM DIISK gt 10 fi 1 1 1 i fi 1 2 0 10 20 30 40 50 a Number of SCF iterations En mra 1 A 3 o S 10 fo x 10 E 108 Simple x e e RMM DIIS 4 2 GR Pulay S 10 Kerker ko RMM DIISK
125. d in the second line of the file The next data are mainly in two parts The first part is the eigenenergies and the second one is the corresponding eigenstates In each part the loop of spin component is the most outer one The next loop is k points followed by band index For eigenstates there is one more inner loop for the basis set An example file generated by the input file Si dat is shown here Fermi level 0 112747 Number of bands 10 1 1 0 566228100179 2 1 0 122518136808 3 1 0 122518129040 4 1 0 122518115949 150 1 0 026598417854 WF kpt 1 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 1 1 0 4790338281 0 0014359768 1 2 0 0440709749 0 0001321095 1 3 0 0000003333 0 0000000000 D File format of HWR file This file contains the hopping integrals between the mth MLWF m 0 in the home unit cell and the nth MLWF n R in the unit cell at R The matrix element m 0 H n R is written in the following way In HWR file the first line is just a description The number of MLWFs number of lattice vectors inside of Wigner Seitz supercell are in the second and third line respectively The unit cell vectors are given in the fifth sixth and seventh lines Spin polarization whether it is a non spin polarized calculation or a spin polarized one with collinear or noncollinear magnetic configuration is given in the eighth line The ninth line gives the Fermi level From the tenth line the block data starts The outer
126. der the constitution of the GNU GPL k k ak ak ak 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K K 2K ak 2k ak 3K 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K I A I I 3K 3K K K 21 K 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 21 25 25 5 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K D2 K kK 2 Rd K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K dd FK FK FK K K K K FK K FK FK FK FK K K K K Rd K 2K FK FK FK FK FK K K K 2K 2K gt K K K K Read the scfout file nacl scfout Previous eigenvalue solver Band 116 atomnum 2 ChemP 0 156250000000 Hartree E_Temp 300 000000000000 K Total_Spins 0 000000000000 K Spin treatment collinear spin unpolarized r space primitive vector Bohr tvi 0 000000 5 319579 5 319579 tv2 5 319579 0 000000 5 319579 tv3 5 319579 5 319579 0 000000 k space primitive vector Bohr 1 rtvi 0 590572 0 590572 0 590572 rtv2 0 590572 0 590572 0 590572 rtv3 0 590572 0 590572 0 590572 Cell1_Volume 301 065992 Bohr 3 Specify the number of grids to discretize reciprocal a b and c vectors e g 2 4 3 k1 0 00000 0 11111 0 22222 0 33333 0 44444 k2 0 00000 0 11111 0 22222 0 33333 0 44444 k3 0 00000 0 11111 0 22222 0 33333 0 44444 Specify the direction of polarization as reciprocal a b and c vectors e g001 111 Then the calculation will start like this calculating the polarization along the a axis The number of strings for Berry phase AB mesh 81 calculating the polarization along the a axis 1 82 calculating the polarization along the a axis 2 82 AO RR
127. dynamic memory allocation parallel execution by Message Passing Interface MPI parallel execution by OpenMP e useful user interface for developers The collinear and non collinear NC DFT methods are implemented including scalar and fully relativistic pseudopotentials respectively The constraint NC DFT is also supported to control spin and orbital magnetic moments These methods will be useful to investigate complicated NC magnetic structures and the effect of spin orbit coupling The diagonalization of the conventional calculations is performed by a ELPA based parallel eigensolver 26 which scales up to several thousands cores The feature may allow us to investigate systems consisting of 1000 atoms using the conventional diagonalization Not only the conventional diagonalization scheme is provided for clusters molecules slab and solids but also linear scaling and a low order scaling methods are supported as eigenvalue solver With a proper choice for the eigenvalue solvers systems consisting of more than 10000 atoms can be treated with careful consideration to balance between accuracy and efficiency As one of the other important features of OpenMX Ver 3 7 it is worth mentioning that electronic transport calculations based on the NEGF method are supported not only for the collinear DFT method but also the NC DFT method with fully relativistic pseudopotentials and the constraint schemes We are continuously working toward development Mo
128. dynamics OpenMX Ver 3 7 supports a multi heat bath molecular dynamics simulation where temperature of each grouped atom is controlled with a heat bath by a velocity scaling scheme 17 The method is performed by the following keyword MD Type NVT_VS4 64 The number of groups is specified by MD num AtomGroup 2 and the groups are defined by lt MD AtomGroup 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 5 2 MD AtomGroup gt The beginning of the description must be lt MD AtomGroup and the last of the description must be MD AtomGroup gt The first column is a sequential serial number for identifying atoms The second column is an identification number for each atom representing the group to which the atom belongs The identification number has to be specified from 1 and followed by 2 3 The above is an example where only five atoms are involved in the system and there are two groups In Ver 3 7 the profile of temperature for all the groups is controlled by the keyword MD TempControl as discussed in the subsection NVT molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling In the feature release we will support a functionality that temperature is independently controlled for each group 15 5 Constraint molecular dynamics A constraint scheme is available in the molecular dynamics simulations in which atoms can be fixed in the initial position The specification is the same as in the subsection Constrained relaxation See
129. e lumo0_0_0_i cube lumo1_0_1 _i cube The LUMOs are output in a Gaussian cube format The first number below lumo means the k point number which is specified in the keyword MO kpoint The second number is a spin state up 0 down 1 The third number specifies the eigenstates i e 0 1 and 2 correspond to LUMO LUMO 1 and LUMO 2 respectively The r and i mean the real and imaginary parts of the wave function If Band Nkpath is not 0 and scf EigenvalueSolver Band the following file is also generated e Band A data file for the band dispersion If Dos fileout ON the following files are also generated e Dos val A data file of eigenvalues for calculating the density of states e Dos vec A data file of eigenvectors for calculating the density of states If scf SpinPolarization NC and level of fileout 1 or 2 the following files are also generated e nco xsf A vector file which stores a non collinear orbital moment projected on each atom by means of Mulliken analysis which can be visualized using Display Forces in XCrySDen e nc xsf A vector file which stores a non collinear spin moment projected on each atom by means of Mulliken analysis which can be visualized using Display Forces in XCrySDen e ncsden xsf A vector file which stores a non collinear spin moment on real space grids which can be visualized using Display Forc
130. e following keywords e orderN Exact Inverse S on off default on In case of orderN Exact Inverse S on the inverse of overlap matrix for each truncated cluster is exactly evaluated Otherwise see the next keyword orderN KrylovS order e orderN KrylovS order 1200 default orderN KrylovH order x4 83 a 5 0 002l fcc Al Ih Ice 55 194 61 66 D bcc Fe DNA E B32LiAl 51 38 40 26 pe g 0 0011 124 135 ied E 47 76 S i dI 500 A 97 100 x 10 E 146 100 fy 02100 100 100 1500 e j 43 100 g o B Krylov oO L N amp 3500F 23 100 Dc Lu Figure 17 a absolute error with respect to the band calculations in the total energy Hartree atom calculated by the Krylov subspace and DC methods for metals and finite gap systems b computa tional time s atom MD For a substantial comparison the calculations were performed using a single Xeon processor The set of numbers in the parenthesis of a means the average number of atoms in the core and buffer regions The set of numbers in the parenthesis of b means the percentage of the dimension of the subspaces relative to the total number of basis functions in the truncated cluster respectively In case of orderN Exact Inverse S off the inverse is approximated by a Krylov subspace method for the inverse where the dimension of the Krylov subspace of overlap matrix in each truncated cluster is give
131. e for the image 2 C2H4_NBE dat_3 input file for the image 3 C2H4_NBE dat_4 input file for the image 4 C2H4_NBE dat_5 input file for the image 5 C2H4_NBE dat_6 input file for the image 6 C2H4_NBE dat_7 input file for the image 7 C2H4_NBE dat_8 input file for the image 8 C2H4_NBE dat_9 input file for the product c2h4_0 out output file for the precursor 161 c2h4_1 out output file for the image 1 c2h4_2 out output file for the image 2 c2h4_3 out output file for the image 3 c2h4_4 out output file for the image 4 c2h4_5 out output file for the image 5 c2h4_6 out output file for the image 6 c2h4_7 out output file for the image 7 c2h4_8 out output file for the image 8 c2h4_9 out output file for the product c2h4 neb opt contains history of optimization for finding MEP as shown in Fig 39 a One can see the details at the header of the file as follows SECC ak 3k ak ak k ak 3k aK ak 3K ak ak 3K aK ak 3K ak aK 3K ak 3K 3K ak 3K K ak 3K K a 3K aK 2K 3K aK ak 3K aK III AICI A I ka gt K FK kk k ak ak 3k ak ak k ak 3k aK ak 3K ak ak 3K ak a 3K ak aK 3K ak 3K 3K ak aK K ak GIGI ICIS ACI ICI K 2K K gt K History of optimization by the NEB method FK kak k ak ak 3k ak ak k ak 3K ak ak 3K ak ak 3K aK ak 3K ak aK 3K ak 3K 3K ak 3K aK a 3K K ak 3K aK a 3K aK 2K 3K aK 2K 3K III I A 2K K gt K FA OO OO EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE A A I RR RK aK iter SD_scaling Maximum force Maximum step Norm Sum of Total Energy of Images Hartree Bohr Ang Hartree Bohr
132. e performed 55 13 Restarting 13 1 General After finishing your first calculation or achieving the self consistency you may want to continue the calculation or to calculate density of states band dispersion molecular orbitals and etc using the self consistent charge in order to save the computational time To do this a keyword scf restart is available scf restart on on off default off When the keyword scf restart is switched on restart files generated by your first calculation will be used as the input Hamiltonian or charge density in the second calculation while System Name in the second calculation should be the same as in the first calculation The restart files are stored means System Name The restart files in in a directory _rst below the work directory where the _rst contain all the information for both the density matrix mixing schemes and k space mixing schemes So it is also possible to use another mixing scheme in the second calculation As an example we illustrate the restarting procedure using an input file C60 dat which can be found in the directory work In Fig 7 we see that the second calculation is accelerated due to the use of the restart file O o I a C60 molecule s kh h 5 3 O A gt 00 e First calc 4971 e Second calc Norm of residual charge density 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Number of SCF iterations F
133. e step 1 is the conventional band structure calculation to construct information of the lead except for adding the following two keywords NEGF output_hks and NEGF filename hks NEGF output_hks on NEGF filename hks lead chain hks The calculated results such as Hamiltonian matrix elements charge distribution and difference Hartree potential are stored in a file specified by the keyword NEGF filename hks In this case a file lead chain hks is generated The file hks is used in the calculation of the step 2 Since the electronic transport is assumed to be along the a axis in the current implementation you have to set the a axis for the direction of electronic transport in the band structure calculation However you do not need rotate your structure All you have to do is to change the specification of the lattice vectors For example if you want to specify a vector 0 0 0 0 10 0 as the a axis in the following lattice vectors 125 lt Atoms UnitVectors 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 Atoms UnitVectors gt you only have to specify as follows lt Atoms UnitVectors 0 0 0 0 10 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 Atoms UnitVectors gt Then the direction of 0 0 0 0 10 0 becomes the direction of electronic transport As shown in the above example when you change the order of the lattice vectors please make sure that the keyword scf Kgrid has to be changed as well In the calculation of the step
134. e_example ZrB2_2x2 dat Elapsed time s 143 16 diff Utot 0 000000000030 diff Force 0 000000000003 16 arge_example nsV4Bz5 dat Elapsed time s 104 20 diff Utot 0 000000010770 diff Force 0 000000000605 Total elapsed time s 2143 68 The comparison was made using 128 MPI processes and 4 OpenMP threads totally 256 cores on CRAY XC30 Since the automatic running test requires large memory you may encounter a seg mentation fault in case that a small number of cores are used Also the above example implies that the total elapsed time is about 36 minutes even using 256 cores See also the Section Large scale calculation for another large scale benchmark calculation 21 6 Input file 6 1 An example methane molecule An input file Methane dat in the directory work is shown below The input file has a flexible data format in such a way that a parameter is given behind a keyword the order of keywords is arbitrary and a blank and a comment can be also described freely For the keywords and options both capital small letters and the mixture are acceptable although these options in below example are written in a specific form File Name System CurrrentDirectory default System Name met level of stdout 1 default 1 1 3 level of fileout 1 default 1 0 2 Definition of Atomic Species Species Number 2 lt Definition of Atomic Species H 4H5 0 si H_PBE13 C C5 0 sipt C_PBE13 Definit
135. ear motion K 19 Calculated temperature for nuclear motion K 22 Nose Hoover Hamiltonian Hartree which means that the first and second columns correspond to MD step and MD time and so on As an example we show a result for the velocity scaling MD of a glycine molecule in Fig 10 a We see that the temperature in a molecule oscillates around the given temperature Also for visualization of molecular dynamics an output file md can be easily animated using free software xmakemol 91 and XCrySDen 61 15 3 NVT molecular dynamics by the Nose Hoover method The Nose Hoover molecular dynamics 18 is supported to perform NVT ensemble molecular dynamics simulations by the following keyword MD Type NVT_NH NOMD Opt NVE NVT_VS NVT_NH Then in this NVT molecular dynamics the temperature for nuclear motion can be controlled by lt MD TempControl 4 1 1000 0 100 1000 0 400 700 0 700 600 0 MD TempControl gt 63 Given Temperature Given Temperature Calculated Temperature Calculated Temperature 200 400 600 200 400 600 MD steps MD steps Figure 10 a Given and calculated temperatures of a glycine molecule as a function of MD steps in a velocity scaling NVT molecular dynamics b Given and calculated temperatures of a glycine molecule as a function of MD steps in the Nose Hoover NVT molecular dynamics The input files are Gly_VS dat and Gly_NH dat in the directory work res
136. eciesAndCoordinates 1 Sc 0 000 0 000 0 000 6 6 4 4 10 0 50 0 160 0 20 0 1 on 2 Sc 2 000 0 000 0 000 6 6 4 4 80 0 50 0 160 0 20 0 1 on Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The 8th and 9th columns give the Euler angles 0 and 4 in order to specify the magnetic field for spin magnetic moment The 12th column is a switch to the constraint 1 means that the constraint is applied and 0 no constraint Since for each atomic site a different direction of the magnetic field can be applied this scheme provides a way of studying non collinear spin configuration It is noted that the keyword scf NC Zeeman Spin and the keyword scf Constraint NC Spin are mutually exclusive Therefore when scf NC Zeeman Spin is on the keyword scf Constraint NC Spin must be switched off as follows scf Constraint NC Spin off onloff default off Although the Zeeman term and the constraint scheme for spin orientation can be regarded as ways for controlling the spin orientation it is noted that the magnitude of spin magnetic moment by the Zeeman term tends to be enhanced unlike the constraint scheme 34 2 Zeeman term for orbital magnetic moment The Zeeman term for orbital magnetic moment is available as an interaction with a uniform magnetic field by the following keywords scf NC Zeeman Orbital on onloff default off scf NC Mag Field Orbital 100 0 default 0 0 Tesla 114 When you include the Zeeman term for orbital magneti
137. ee images are parallelized at once where the MPI processes are classified to three groups and utilized for the parallelization of each image among the three images In order to complete the calculations of all the images the grouped calculations are repeated by floor the number of images MD NEB Parallel Number times The scheme may be useful for the NEB calculation of a large scale system If the keyword is not specified in your input file the default parallelization scheme is employed 42 8 Other tips It would be better to provide atomic coordinates for bulk systems in Ang or AU instead of FRAC since the atomic position tends to be translated in FRAC to keep the fractional coordinate within 0 to 1 The translation tends to generate a confusing movie in the visualization of the result Only three routines are added to implement the NEB functionality They are neb c neb_run c and neb_check c The main routine is neb c It may be easy to implement related methods in neb c 165 43 STM image by the Tersoff Hamann scheme Scanning tunneling microscope STM image can be obtained by the Tersoff Hamann scheme 52 The method is nothing but calculation of partial charge density in an energy window measured from the chemical potential The calculation of the partial charge density is performed by the following keywords partial charge on onloff default off partial charge energy window 0 0 in eV where the second keyword defines an ener
138. ee occupation number operators onsite full and dual are available which can be specified by the keyword scf Hubbard Occupation Hubbard U values An effective U value on each orbital of species is defined by the following keyword lt Hubbard U values eV Ni s 0 0 2s 0 0 ip 0 0 2p 0 0 1d 4 0 2d 0 0 0 1s 0 0 2s 0 0 ip 0 0 2p 0 0 1d 0 0 Hubbard U values gt The beginning of the description must be lt Hubbard U values and the last of the description must be Hubbard U values gt For all the basis orbitals specified by the Definition of Atomic Species you have to give an effective U value in the above format The 1s and 2s mean the first and second s orbital and the number behind 1s is the effective U value eV for the first s orbital The same rule is applied to p and d orbitals scf Constraint NC Spin The keyword scf Constraint NC Spin should be switched ON ON OFF when the constraint DFT method for the non collinear spin orientation is performed scf Constraint NC Spin v The keyword scf Constraint NC Spin v gives a prefactor eV of the penalty functional in the con straint DFT for the non collinear spin orientation scf ElectronicTemperature The electronic temperature K is given by the keyword scf ElectronicTemperature The default is 300 K scf energycutoff The keyword scf energycutoff specifies the cutoff energy which is used in the calcu
139. elation terms LDA was used We used 12x 12x 12 and 140 Ryd for scf Kgrid and scf energycutoff respectively Also the experimental value 5 65A was used for the lattice constant The input file is GaAs dat in the directory work 105 Table 3 Calculated spin orbit splittings eV at the Ty5 and the L3 of a bulk GaAs The other theoretical values LMTO Ref 69 PP Ref 70 and experimental value Ref 71 are also shown for comparison The calculation conditions are given in the caption of Fig 26 and the input file is GaAs dat in the directory work Level OpenMX LMTO PP Expt Di5u 0 344 0 351 0 35 0 34 Lav 0 213 0 213 0 22 Then the spin orbit coupling can be self consistently incorporated within the pseudopotential scheme rather than a perturbation scheme Due to the spin orbit coupling a and 8 spin components in the two component spinor can directly interact In order to determine the absolute spin orientation in the non collinear DFT calculations you have to include the spin orbit coupling otherwise the spin orientation is not uniquely determined in real space As an illustration of spin orbit splitting we show band structures of a bulk GaAs calculated by the non collinear DFT without and with spin orbit coupling in Fig 26 where the input file is GaAs dat in the directory work In Fig 26 b we can see that there are spin orbit splittings in the band dispersion while no spin orbit split
140. ell If you do not define Band KPath UnitCell the reciprocal lattice vectors which are calculated by the unit vectors speci fied in Atoms Unit Vectors is employed for the calculation of the band dispersion In case of fcc bec base centered cubic and trigonal cells the reciprocal lattice vectors for the calculation of the band dispersion should be specified using the keyword Band KPath UnitCell based on the consuetude in the band structure calculations 70 18 Density of states 18 1 Conventional scheme The density of states DOS is calculated by the following two steps 1 SCF calculation Let us illustrate the calculation of DOS using the carbon diamond In a file Cdia dat in the directory work the keywords for the DOS calculation are set to Dos fileout on Dos Erange 25 0 20 0 Dos Kgrid 12 12 12 In the specification of the keyword Dos Erange the first and second values are the lower and upper bounds of the energy range eV for the DOS calculation respectively where the origin 0 0 of energy corresponds to the chemical potential Also in the specification of the keyword Dos Kgrid a set of numbers n1 n2 n3 is the number of grids to discretize the first Brillouin zone in the k space which is used in the DOS calculation Then we execute OpenMX by openmx Cdia dat When the execution is completed normally then you can find files cdia Dos val and cdia Dos vec
141. en atom For the definition of atomic mass we use the unified atomic mass unit that the principal isotope of carbon atom is 12 0 66 16 Visualization The electron densities molecular orbitals and potentials are output to files in a Gaussian cube format Figure 11 shows examples of isosurface maps visualized by XCrySDen 61 These data are output in a form of the Gaussian cube So many softwares such as Molekel 60 and XCrySDen 61 can be used for the visualization One can find the details of output files in the cube format in the Section Output files a b Figure 11 a Isosurface map of the total electron density of a Ceo molecule where 0 13 was used as isovalue of total electron density b Isosurface map of the highest occupied molecular orbital HOMO of a glycine molecule where 0 06 was used as isovalue of the molecular orbital b Isosurface map of the spin electron density of a molecular magnet Mnj2012 CH3COO 16 H2O 4 62 where 0 02 was used as isovalue of the spin electron density 17 Band dispersion The band dispersion is calculated by the following two steps 1 SCF calculation Let us illustrate the calculation of band dispersion using the carbon diamond In a file Cdia dat of the directory work the atomic coordinates cell vectors and scf Kgrid are given by Atoms Number 2 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit Ang Ang AU lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 0 000 0 000 0 000
142. en you use the scheme the keyword Dos fileout must be off as follows Dos fileout off onloff default off 73 Also the following two keywords are valid for both the keywords Dos fileout and DosGauss file Dos Erange 20 0 20 0 default 20 20 Dos Kgrid 555 default Kgridi Kgrid2 Kgrid3 It should be noted that the keyword DosGauss fileout generates only the Gaussian broadening DOS which means that DOS by the tetrahedron method cannot be calculated by the keyword Dos Gauss fileout After the OpenMX calculation with these keywords the procedure for DosMain is the same as in the conventional scheme 74 19 Orbital optimization The radial function of basis orbitals can be variationally optimized using the orbital optimization method 28 As an illustration of the orbital optimization let us explain it using a methane molecule of which input file is Methane_00 dat In the orbital optimization method the optimized orbitals are expressed by the linear combination of primitive orbitals and obtained by variationally optimizing the contraction coefficients The number of the primitive and optimized orbitals in the optimization are specified by lt Definition of Atomic Species H H5 0 s4 gt 1 H_CA13 C C5 0 s4 gt 1p4 gt 1 C_CA13 Definition of Atomic Species gt For H one optimized radial function for the s orbital is obtained from the linear combination of four primitive radial functio
143. eps 143 Wannier Minimizing Scheme 143 Wannier Minimizing Secant StepLength 143 Wannier Minimizing Secant Steps 143 Wannier Minimizing StepLength 143 Wannier Outer Window Bottom 139 Wannier Outer Window Top 139 195 Wannier Readin Overlap Matrix 143 144 196
144. equivalent to each other 141 Table 6 Orbitals and hybrids used as projector The hybridization is done within the new coordinate system defined by z axis and x axis Orbital name Number of included Description projector S 1 s orbital from PAOs p 3 Pz Py Pz from PAOs px 1 px from PAOs py 1 Py from PAOs pz 1 pz from PAOs d 5 d 2 dg2 y2 dry dzz dyz from PAOs dz2 1 d 2 from PAOs dx2 y2 1 d 2_y2 from PAOs dxy 1 dzy from PAOs dxz 1 dy from PAOSs dyz 1 dy from PAOs f 7 f fz22 fs Fza2 fxyz Fes 3eyas Faye 48 from PAOs fz3 1 f 3 from PAOs fxz2 1 fz22 from PAOs fyz2 1 fyz2 from PAOs fzx2 1 fzx2 from PAOs fxyz 1 feyz from PAOs fx3 3xy2 1 fr3 32y2 from PAOs f3yx2 y3 1 F3yx2 y3 from PAOs sp 2 Hybridization between s and px orbitals including als Px and als Dx sp2 3 Hybridization among s px and py orbitals including zs Prd GD zs Da Py and 55 7D sp3 4 Hybridization among s px py and pz orbitals Ga S Pe Py Pz Ja S Po Py Pz F s Po Py Pz a S Pe Py Pz sp3dz2 5 Hybridization among S Px Py P2 and d 2 orbitals Ls Pg Py e Va EY ver De ade aP Jada sp3deg 6 Hybridization among s Px Py Pz and d 2 d 2_y2 OT bitals es Da Fade 5242 755 Dz 73d dz2 y2 75 Py de Dd y2 2 75 Py rade 5 dy2 y2
145. es dat in the directory work input_example OpenMX will generate the output files out in work input_example So you can add a new dat file which is used in the next running test But please make sure that the previous out files in work input_example will be overwritten by this procedure For advanced testers for checking the reliability of code see also the Sections Automatic force tester and Automatic memory leak tester 20 5 Automatic running test with large scale systems In some cases one may want to know machine performance for more time consuming calculations For this purpose an automatic running test with relatively large scale systems can be performed by For the MPI parallel running mpirun np 128 openmx runtestL For the OpenMP MPI parallel running mpirun np 128 openmx runtestL nt 2 Then OpenMX will run with 16 test files and compare calculated results with the reference results which are stored in work large_example The comparison absolute difference in the total energy and force is stored in a file runtestL result in the directory work The reference results were calculated using 16 MPI processes of a 2 6 GHz Xeon cluster machine If the difference is within last seven digits we may consider that the installation is successful As an example runtestL result generated by the automatic running test is shown below
146. es in XCrySDen 40 8 Functional In OpenMX local density approximations LDA LSDA 2 3 4 and a generalized gradient approx imation GGA 5 to exchange correlation functional are used Using a keyword scf XcType you can choose one of approximations to the exchange correlation functional scf XcType LDA LDA LSDA CA LSDA PW GGA PBE Currently LDA LSDA CA LSDA PW and GGA PBE are available where LSDA CA is the local spin density functional of Ceperley Alder 2 LSDA PW is the local spin density functional of Perdew Wang in which the gradient of density is set in zero in their GGA formalism 4 Note LSDA CA is faster than LSDA PW GGA PBE is GGA proposed by Perdew Burke and Ernz erhof 5 The GGA is implemented by using the first order finite difference method in real space In addition LDA U or GGA U functionals are also available For the details see the Section LDA U The relevant keyword to specify the spin un polarized and non collinear calculations is scf SpinPolarization scf SpinPolarization off On Off NC If the calculation for the spin polarization is performed then specify ON If the calculation for the non spin polarization is performed then specify OFF When you use LDA for the keyword scf XcType the keyword scf SpinPolarization must be off In addition to these options NC is supported for the non collinear DFT ca
147. etween the collinear and NC versions is that the step 3 is performed by a program code TranMain_NC which can be compiled in the source directory as follows 136 make TranMain_NC There is no other difference in using the functionality compared to the collinear version As an example we show a result for zigzag graphene nanoribbon calculated by the NEGF method coupled with NC DFT in Fig 34 It is assumed that spin moments at the zigzag edges align upward and rightward in the left and right leads respectively Those calculations were performed by the conventional NC band structure method with the constraint scheme as the step 1 Then any constraint was not applied in the calculation of the step 2 After getting the SCF convergence in the step 2 it is found that the spin direction gradually rotates in the central region as shown in Fig 34 a The calculations can be traced by input files Lead L 8ZGNR NC dat Lead R 8ZGNR NC dat and NEGF 8ZGNR NC dat stored in the directory work negfexample Also you will find another example for input files of a gold chain in the same directory Transmission Energy eV Figure 34 a Zigzag graphene nanoribbon with non collinear spin direction represented by arrow The length of the arrow corresponds to magnitude of the spin moment In calculations of the step 1 the constraint scheme to control spin direction was applied so that spin moments at the
148. ev B 70 184421 2004 M J Han T Ozaki and J Yu Phys Rev B 74 045110 2006 L V Woodcock Chem Phys Lett 10 257 1971 S Nose J Chem Phys 81 511 1984 S Nose Mol Phys 52 255 1984 G H Hoover Phys Rev A 31 1695 1985 G B Bachelet D R Hamann and M Schluter Phys Rev B 26 4199 1982 N Troullier and J L Martine Phys Rev B 43 1993 1991 L Kleinman and D M Bylander Phys Rev Lett 48 1425 1982 P E Blochl Phys Rev B 41 5414 1990 I Morrison D M Bylander L Kleinman Phys Rev B 47 6728 1993 D Vanderbilt Phys Rev B 41 7892 1990 H J Monkhorst and J D Pack Phys Rev B 13 5188 1976 T Auckenthaler V Blum H J Bungartz T Huckle R Johanni L Kraemer B Lang and H Lederer P R Willems Parallel Computing 27 783 2011 K Lejaeghere V Van Speybroeck G Van Oost and S Cottenier arXiv 1204 2733v3 http arxiv org abs 1204 2733v3 T Ozaki Phys Rev B 67 155108 2003 T Ozaki and H Kino Phys Rev B 69 195113 2004 T Ozaki and H Kino Phys Rev B 72 045121 2005 T Ozaki Phys Rev B 74 245101 2006 T V T Duy and T Ozaki arXiv 1209 4506v1 T V T Duy and T Ozaki arXiv 1302 6189v1 S F Boys and F Bernardi Mol Phys 19 553 1970 S Simon M Duran and J J Dannenberg J Chem Phys 105 11024 1996 M C Payne M P Teter D C Allan T A Arias and J Joannopoulos Rev Mod Ph
149. for each multiple orbital The second summation is sum over m mul which means a summation over both magnetic quantum number and orbital multiplicity where mul tiple means a number to specify a radial wave function Therefore Mulliken charges are decomposed to contributions of all the orbitals 99 28 2 Voronoi charge Voronoi charge of each atom is calculated by integrating electron and spin densities in a Voronoi polyhedron The Voronoi polyhedron is constructed from smeared surfaces which are defined by a Fuzzy cell partitioning method 49 It should be noted that this Voronoi analysis gives often overestimated or underestimated charge since Voronoi polyhedron is determined by only the structure without taking account of atomic radius If you want to calculate Voronoi charge specify the following keyword Voronoi charge in your input file Voronoi charge on onloff default off In case of a methane molecule the following Voronoi charges are output to out FRE k ak ak ak 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K K CCC 3K 3K A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K 21 K 21 K K K K 2 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 3K 2K 2K kk k ak AAAI 3K K K K K K K K CC CCC A A A A 3K 3K K K K K 21 21 24 21 25 21 25 21 2 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K Voronoi charges FEA ak ak 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K IRC CCC ACA A A A A 3K 3K K K K K gt K 21 21 21 K K K K 2K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K KKK KKK 2K FK FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K RR 2K FK FK FK FK K K K K K
150. gcec pgCC pgf77 pgf90 and the ACML library for LAPACK and BLAS CC mpicc fast mp Dnosse I usr local fftw3 include I usr local acml gnu64 include FC mpif90 fast mp I usr local acml gnu64 include LIB L usr local fftw3 lib lfftw3 usr local acml gnu64 lib libacml a usr lib64 libg2c a pef90libs Important The preprocessor option Dnosse must be specified with the PGI C compiler when mp is used for enabling OpenMP e GNU C and FORTRAN compilers gcc g gfortran and the MKL library for LAPACK and BLAS MKLROOT opt intel mkl CC mpicc 03 ffast math fopenmp I usr local fftw3 include I SMKLROOT include FC mpif90 O3 ffast math fopenmp I MKLROOT include LIB L usr local fftw3 lib lfftw3 L SMKLROOT lib intel64 Imkl_intel 1p64 lmkl intel_thread Imkl_core lpthread lgfortran e GNU C and FORTRAN compilers gcc g gfortran and the ACML library for LAPACK and BLAS CC mpicc 03 ffast math fopenmp I usr local fftw3 include I usr local acml gnu64 include FC mpif90 O3 ffast math fopenmp I usr local acml gnu64 include LIB L usr local fftw3 lib lfftw3 usr local acml gnu64 lib libacml a lgfortran Other combinations of the compiler and LAPACK and BLAS libraries can be done in the same fashion The following commands can be used to show information about the compiler Intel PGI GNU etc used by MPI mpicc compile info with MPICH mpicc help with OpenMPI In some cases the location of
151. ght line can be very erratic so that distance between atoms can be too close to each other In this case one should explicitly provide the atomic coordinates of images The user defined initial path can be provided by the same way as for the restarting Then one has to provide atomic coordinates for each image by the following keywords lt NEB1 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 Si 0 12960866043083 0 13490502997627 0 12924862991035 2 0 2 Si 0 40252421446808 5 19664433048606 4 91248322056082 2 0 NEB1 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt lt NEB2 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 Si 0 08436294149342 0 02173837971883 0 08374099211565 2 0 2 Si 0 33677725120015 5 10216241168093 5 01087499461541 NEB2 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt 164 For all the images of which number is given by MD NEB Number Images the atomic coordinates need to be provided Also it is required for a keyword to be switched on as scf restart on 42 6 Monitoring the NEB calculation In the NEB calculation the standard output will display only that for the image 1 and those for the other images will not be displayed However there is no guarantee that the SCF iteration con verges for all the images In order to monitor the SCF convergence for all the images temporary files can be checked by users In the NEB calculation an input file is generated for each image whose name is dat_ where runs from 0 to MD NEB Number Images 1 and system name
152. gn basis functions in any vacant region using an empty atom You will find the empty atom E in the web site of the database http www openmx square org Using the pseudopotential for the empty atom E though the pseudopotential is a flat zero potential you can put basis functions at any place independently of atomic position To do that you can define empty atoms by lt Definition of Atomic Species H H5 0 s2p1 H_PBE13 C C5 0 s2p1 C_PBE13 EH H5 0 s2p1 E EC C5 0 s2p1 E Definition of Atomic Species gt In the example two sorts of empty atoms are defined as EH and EC which have basis sets specified by H5 0 s2p1 and C5 0 s2p1 respectively which means that one can use any basis functions for an empty atom as shown above Then EH and EC can be put to any place by the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates where the number of electrons for the empty atom is zero To define 45 an empty atom only thing you have to do is to use E vps as pseudopotential for the empty atom The empty atom scheme enables us not only to estimate the basis set superposition error BSSE using the counterpoise correction CP method 33 34 but also to treat a vacancy state and a nearly free electron state on metal surfaces within the linear combination of pseudo atomic orbitals LCPAO method As an example a calculation of a F center in NaCl with a Cl vacancy is shown in Fig 3 We see that the highest occupied state
153. gorithm A typical MPI execution is as follows mpirun np 4 openmx DIA512_DC dat gt diab12_dc std amp The input file DIA512_DC dat found in the directory work is for the SCF calculation 1 MD of the diamond including 512 carbon atoms using the divide conquer DC method The speed up ratio in comparison of the elapsed time per MD step is shown in Fig 19 a as a function of the number of processes on a CRAY XC30 2 6 GHz Xeon processors We see that the parallel efficiency decreases as the number of processors increase and the speed up ratio at 128 CPUs is about 84 The decreasing efficiency is due to the decrease of the number of atoms allocated to one processor So the weight of other unparallelized parts such as disk I O becomes significant Moreover it should be noted that the efficiency is significantly reduced in non uniform systems in terms of atomic species and geometrical structure due to disruption of the road balance while an algorithm is implemented to avoid the disruption See also the subsection Krylov subspace method for further information on parallelization 21 2 Cluster calculation In the cluster calculation a double parallelization is made for two loops spin multiplicity and eigen states where the spin multiplicity is one for the spin unpolarized and non collinear calculation and two for the spin polarized calculation respectively The priority of parallelization is in order of spin multiplicity and
154. gy window in eV measured from the chemical potential a plus value means conduction band and negative valence Since the calculation of the partial charge density is performed during calculation of the density of states DOS the following keywords have to be specified as well Dos fileout on onloff default off Dos Erange 20 0 20 0 default 20 20 Dos Kgrid 555 default Kgridi Kgrid2 Kgrid3 After the calculation with the keywords you will get pden cube which can be used for the STM simulation within the Tersoff Hamman approximation As an example a simulated STM image of a graphene layer is shown in Fig 41 166 Figure 41 Simulated STM image of a graphene layer where partial charge energy window of 2 eV was used in the calculation and the input file is Graphene_STM dat in the directory work The cube file Graphene_STM pden cube was visualized with an isovalue of 0 0001 by a software WSxM 92 44 DFT D2 method for vd W interaction The DFT D2 method by Grimme 86 is supported to include a vdW interaction The following keywords are relevant to the DFT D2 method scf dftD on onloff default off DFTD Unit Ang Ang AU DFTD rcut_dftD 100 0 default 100 DFTD Unit DFTD d 20 0 default 20 DFTD scale6 0 75 default 0 75 DFTD IntDirection 111 default 1 1 1 1 on O off When you include the vdW correction switch on scf dftD The cutoff radius for the pairwise interac tio
155. h lies in the Wigner Seitz supercells conjugated with the sampled k grids For restarting optimization calculation mmr file will be read instead of written More detailed information of the four files will be given below A File format of mmn file This file structure is closely following that in Wannier90 87 The first line of this file is the description of the numbers in the second line The numbers from left to right in the second line are the number Nwin of included bands within the outer window the number of k points the number of b vectors the number of spin component respectively The next lines are data blocks of MED The most outer loop is for spin component The next is the loop of k points and then b vectors The most inner loops are the band index n and m respectively In each block the first line are 5 numbers The first two numbers are the index of present k point and the index of neighboring point k b respectively The next three numbers indicates in which unit cell k b point lies From the second line are the real and imaginary part of each matrix element In each block there are Nwin X Nin complex numbers An example file generated by the input file Si dat is shown here Mmn_zero k b band_num kpt_num bvector num spinsize 10 512 8 1 1 512 0 0 0 0 571090282808 0 819911068319 0 000031357498 0 000045367307 0 000149292597 0 000215591228 0 003821911756 0 005522040495 0 028616452988 0 01980
156. have to keep the same computational parameters such as unit cell cutoff energy basis functions pseudopotentials and electronic temperatures to avoid numerical inconsistency After the calculations 1 and 2 files dat are generated By using the atomic coordinates in the files dat one can easily construct an input file for the calculation 3 Once you have an input file for the calculation 3 the execution of the NEB calculation is the same as for the conventional OpenMX calculation such as mpirun np 32 openmx input dat nt 4 159 42 3 Examples and keywords Two input files are provided as example e C2H4 NEB dat Cycloaddition reaction of two ethylene molecules to cyclobutane e Si8 NEB dat Diffusion of an interstitial hydrogen atom in the diamond Si The input file C2H4_NEB dat will be used to illustrate the NEB calculation in the proceeding expla nation Providing two terminal structures The atomic coordinates of the precursor are specified in the input file by lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 2 C 3 H 4 H 5 H 6 H 7 C 8 C 9 H 10 H 11 H 12 H 0 66829065594143 0 66817412917689 1 24159214112072 1 24159212192367 24165800644131 24165801380425 66829065113509 0 66817411530651 1 24159211310925 1 24159212332935 1 1 24165799549343 24165801426648 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The atomic coordinates of the product are specified in the lt NEB Atoms
157. he geometry optimization step at which DIIS EF or RF starts is specified by the keyword MD Opt StartDIIS The geometry optimization steps before starting the DIIS type method is per formed by the steepest decent method The default value is 5 MD TempControl The keyword specifies temperature for atomic motion in MD of the NVT ensembles In NVT_VS the temperature for nuclear motion can be controlled by lt MD TempControl 3 100 2 1000 0 0 0 400 10 700 0 0 4 700 40 500 0 0 7 MD TempControl gt 33 The beginning of the description must be lt MD TempControl and the last of the description must be MD TempControl gt The first number 3 gives the number of the following lines to control the temperature In this case you can see that there are three lines Following the number 3 in the consecutive lines the first column means MD steps and the second column gives the interval of MD steps that the velocity scaling is made For the above example a velocity scaling is performed at every two MD steps until 100 MD steps at every 10 MD steps from 100 to 400 MD steps and at every 40 MD steps from 400 to 700 MD steps The third and fourth columns give a given temperature K and a scaling parameter qa in the interval For further details see the Section Molecular dynamics On the other hand in NVT_NH the temperature for nuclear motion can be controlled by lt MD TempControl 4 1 1000 0 100 1000
158. he list does not include all the keywords in OpenMX and those keywords will be explaned in each corresponding section File name System CurrrentDir The output directory of output files is specified by this keyword The default is System Name The file name of output files is specified by this keyword DATA PATH The path to the VPS and PAO directories can be specified in your input file by the following keyword DATA PATH DFT_DATA13 default DFT_DATA13 Both the absolute and relative specifications are available The default is DFT_DATA13 level of stdout 23 The amount of the standard output during the calculation is controlled by the keyword level of stdout In case of level of stdout 1 minimum information In case of level of stdout 2 additional informa tion together with the minimum output information level of stdout 3 is for developers The default is 1 level of fileout The amount of information output to the files is controlled by the keyword level of fileout In case of level of fileout 0 minimum information no Gaussian cube and grid files In case of level of fileout 1 standard output In case of level of fileout 2 additional information together with the standard output The default is 1 Definition of Atomic Species Species Number The number of atomic species in the system is specified by the keyword Species Number Definition of
159. he pseudo atomic orbitals are used for projectors the specification of them is the same as for the basis functions An example setting for silicon in diamond structure is as following Species Number 2 lt Definition of Atomic Species Si Si7 0 s2p2d1 Si_CA11 proji 1i5 5 sipidif1 Si_CA11 Definition of Atomic Species gt In this example since we employ PAOs from Si as projectors an additional specie projl is defined as shown above Inside the pair keywords lt Definition of Atomic Species and Definition of Atomic Species gt in addition to the first line used for Si atoms one species for the projectors is defined Its name is projl defined by Si5 5 s1p1d1f1 and the pseudopotential Si_CA In fact the pseudopotential de fined in this line will not be used It is given just for keeping the consistence of inputting data structure One can use any PAO as projector Also the use of only a single basis set is allowed for each l component We strongly recommend user to specify s1p1d1f1 in all cases to avoid possible error 140 B Specify the orbital central position and orientation of a projector Pair keywords lt Wannier Initial Projectos and Wannier Initial Projectos gt will be used to specify the projector name local orbital function center of local orbital and the local z axis and x axis for orbital orientation An example setting is shown here lt Wannier Initial Projectors pr
160. here 42 Pseudo potential Hartree UON9UNY SABA JE Ipey Figure 1 Primitive basis functions for s orbitals of a carbon pseudo atom with a confinement pseu dopotential each basis function is the product of the radial function and a real spherical harmonics function The accuracy and efficiency of the calculations can be controlled by two parameters a cutoff radius and the number of basis functions In general one can get the convergent results by increasing the cutoff radius and the number of basis functions as shown in Fig 2 However it is noted that the use of a large number of basis orbitals with a large cutoff radius requires an extensive computational resource such as memory size and computational time The general trend to choose the cutoff radius and the number of basis orbitals in a compromise way is discussed in Ref 28 where you may find that basis orbitals with a higher angular momentum are needed to achieve the sufficient convergence for elements such as F and Cl in the right hand side of the periodic table and that a large cutoff radius of basis orbitals should be used for elements such as Li and Na in the left hand side of the periodic table Since optimized basis functions are available on the web site http www openmx square org as the database Ver 2013 We recommend for general users to use these optimized basis functions instead of the primitive PAO functions 9 3 Optimized basis functions provided by the dat
161. hird column the file name for the pseudopotentials without the file extension is given Also the file must exist in the directory DFT_DATA13 VPS It can be possible to assign as the different atomic species for the same atomic element by specifying the different basis orbitals and pseudopotentials For example you can define the atomic species as follows lt Definition of Atomic Species H1 H5 0 s1p1 H_CA13 H2 H5 0 s2p2d1 H_CA13 C1 C5 0 s2p2 C_CA13 C2 C5 0 s2p2d2 C_CA13 24 Definition of Atomic Species gt The flexible definition may be useful for the decrease of computational efforts in which only high level basis functions are used for atoms belonging to the essential part which determines the electric properties in the system and lower level basis functions are used for atoms in the other inert parts Atoms Atoms Number The total number of atoms in the system is specified by the keyword Atoms Number Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit The unit of the atomic coordinates is specified by the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit Please specify Ang when you use the unit of Angstrom and AU when the unit of atomic unit The fractional coordinate is also available by FRAC Then please specify the coordinates spanned by a b and c axes given in Atoms Unit Vectors In the fractional coordinates the coordinates can range from 0 5 to 0 5 and the coordinates beyond its range will be automatically
162. i 20 8 049218519560 40 8 032819076631 80 8 033382638844 120 8 033515406506 160 8 033671477264 200 8 033793661537 300 8 034041263333 400 8 034166130227 600 8 034325637002 1000 8 034477885766 oo o al Total energy Hartree oo o oo S 200 400 600 800 1000 Cutoff energy Ryd on Figure 4 Convergence of the total energy of a methane molecule with respect to the cutoff energy 49 Table 1 Convergence of structural parameters dipole moment of a water molecule with respect to the cutoff energy The input file is H2O dat in the directory work Ecut Ryd r H O A Z H O H deg Dipole moment Debye 60 0 970 103 4 1 838 90 0 971 103 7 1 829 120 0 971 103 7 1 832 150 0 971 103 6 1 829 180 0 971 103 6 1 833 Exp 0 957 104 5 1 85 11 2 A tip for calculating the energy curve for bulks When the energy curve for bulk system is calculated as a function of the lattice parameter a sudden change of the number of real space grids is a serious problem which produces an erratic discontinuity on the energy curve In fact we see the discontinuity in cases of 200 and 290 Ryd in Fig 5 when the cutoff energy is fixed The discontinuity occurs at the lattice parameter where the number of grids changes To avoid the discontinuity on the energy curve a keyword scf Ngrid is available scf Ngrid 32 32 32 ni n2 and n3 for a b and c axes When the number of grids i
163. igure 7 SCF convergence of a Ceo molecule In the second calculation the restart files generated by the first calculation were used The input file is C60 dat in the directory work 13 2 Extrapolation scheme during MD and geometry optimization In the geometry optimization and molecular dynamics simulations the restart files generated at the previous steps are automatically utilized at the next step to accelerate the convergence using an 56 extrapolation scheme 42 43 In the extrapolation scheme the number of previous MD or geometry optimization steps can be controlled by a keyword scf ExtCharge History 2 default 2 From a series of benchmark calculations scf ExtCharge History of 2 works well and a larger number tends to be numerically unstable So users are recommended to use the default setting of 2 13 3 Input file for the restart calculation An input file dat is generated at every MD step for the restart calculation with the final structure and the same Grid_Origin explained in the Section Fixing the relative position of regular grid Using the file dat it can be possible to continue MD calculations and geometry optimization from the last step 57 14 Geometry optimization 14 1 Steepest decent optimization An example of the geometry optimization is illustrated in this Section As an initial structure let us consider the methane molecule given in the Section Input file
164. imization steps before starting these methods is performed by the steepest decent method as in Opt The default value is 5 The initial step in the optimization is automatically tuned by monitoring the maximum force in the initial structure As shown in Fig 9 which shows the number of geometry steps to achieve the maximum force of below 0 0003 Hartree Bohr in molecules and bulks in most cases the RF method seems to be the most robust and efficient scheme while the EF and BFGS methods also show a similar performance The input files used for those calculations and the out files can be found in the directory work geoopt_example It should be also noted that by these quasi Newton methods geometrical structures tend to be converged to a saddle point rather than a stationary minimum point This is because the structure at which the quasi Newton method started to be employed does not reach at a flexion point In such a case the structure should be optimized well by the steepest decent method before moving to the quasi Newton method The treatment can be easily done by only taking a larger value for MD Opt StartDIIS or by restarting the calculation using a file dat where is System Name specified in your input file 59 200 160 120 80 40 ml mi illi Methane Glycine Cg Sialic Water Nitro acid dimer C H6 Number of optimization steps to achieve 10 hartree bohr 200 T T T T T
165. in density functional of Perdew Wang in which the gradient of density is set to zero in their GGA formalism 4 Note LSDA CA is faster than LSDA PW GGA PBE is a GGA functional proposed by Perdew et al 5 scf SpinPolarization The keyword scf SpinPolarization specifies the non spin polarization or the spin polarization for the electronic structure If the calculation for the spin polarization is performed then specify ON If the calculation for the non spin polarization is performed then specify OFF When you use LDA for the keyword scf XcType the keyword scf SpinPolarization must be OFF In addition to these options NC is supported for the non collinear DFT calculation For this calculation see also the Section Non collinear DFT scf partialCoreCorrection The keyword scf partialCoreCorrection is a flag for a partial core correction PCC in calculations of exchange correlation energy and potential ON means that PCC is made and OFF is none In any cases the flag should be ON since pseudopotentials generated with PCC should be used with PCC and also PCC does not affect the result for pseudopotentials without PCC because of zero PCC charge in this case scf Hubbard U In case of the LDA U or GGA U calculation the keyword scf Hubbard U should be switched ON ON OFF The default is OFF 26 scf Hubbard Occupation In the LDA U method thr
166. in the directory work The eigenvalues and eigenvectors are stored in the files cdia Dos val and cdia Dos vec in a text and binary forms respectively The DOS calculation is supported even for the O N calculation while a Gaussian broadening method is employed in this case 2 Calculation of the DOS Let us compile a program package for calculating DOS Move the directory source and then compile as follows make DosMain When the compile is completed normally then you can find an executable file DosMain in the directory source Please copy the file DosMain to the directory work and then move to the directory work You can calculate DOS and projected DOS PDOS using the program DosMain from two files cdia Dos val and cdia Dos vec as DosMain cdia Dos val cdia Dos vec Then you are interactively asked from the program as follow DosMain cdia Dos val cdia Dos vec Max of Spe_Total_CNO 8 71 DOS PDOS of s orbital in atom 1 1 5 PDOS of p in atom 1 gt 2 5 2 O 1 9 a T ja o S 8 O O Q 0 5 Eigenenergy eV Figure 13 DOS and PDOS of the carbon diamond and the integrated PDOS where the Fermi level is set to zero Since charge redistribution occurs among the s p and d orbitals the integrated PDOS of s and p orbitals at the Fermi level are not exactly 1 The calculation can be traced by using an input file Cdia dat
167. ion Step Distance from the precursor bohr Figure 39 a History of optimization c2h4 neb opt for the NEB calculation for a cycloaddition reaction of two ethylene molecules to a cyclobutane molecule b change of total energy c2h4 neb ene of two ethylene molecules as a function of the distance Bohr from the precursor and the corresponding geometrical structures c2h4 neb xyz of images on the minimum energy path The input file used for the NEB calculation is C2H4 NEB dat in the directory work 7 27 91765377 0 82175187 5 75296486 8 28 02520689 0 82164937 6 57461423 9 28 06207901 0 82095145 7 39556568 where the first column is a serial number of image while O and 9 correspond to the precursor and product respectively The second column is the total energy of each image The third and fourth columns are interval Bohr between two neighboring images and the distance Bohr from the pre gt is System Name and is a serial cursor in geometrical phase space A file dat_ where number for each image is also generated since each calculation for each image is basically done as an independent OpenMX calculation with a different input file A corresponding output file _4 out is also generated which may be useful to analyze how the electronic structure changes on MEP As well as the case of C2H4 _NEB dat one can perform the NEB calculation by Si8_NEB dat After the successful calculation you may get
168. ion of Atomic Species gt Atoms Atoms Number 5 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit Ang Ang AU lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 2 0 2 0 2 H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 3 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 4 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 5 H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt Atoms UnitVectors Unit Ang Ang AU lt Atoms UnitVectors 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 Atoms UnitVectors gt SCF or Electronic System 22 scf XcType GGA PBE LDA LSDA CA LSDA PW GGA PBE scf SpinPolarization off OnlOff NC scf ElectronicTemperature 300 0 default 300 K scf energycutoff 120 0 default 150 Ry scf maxIter 100 default 40 scf EigenvalueSolver cluster DC Cluster Band scf Kgrid 111 means n x n2 x n3 scf Mixing Type rmm diis Simple Rmm Diis Gr Pulay Kerker Rmm Diisk scf Init Mixing Weight 0 30 default 0 30 scf Min Mixing Weight 0 001 default 0 001 scf Max Mixing Weight 0 400 default 0 40 scf Mixing History 7 default 5 scf Mixing StartPulay 5 default 6 scf criterion 1 0e 10 default 1 0e 6 Hartree MD or Geometry Optimization MD Type nomd Nomd Opt NVE NVT_VS NVT_NH Constraint_Opt DIIS MD maxIter 1 default 1 MD TimeStep 1 0 default 0 5 fs MD Opt criterion 1 0e 4 default 1 0e 4 Hartree Bohr 6 2 Keywords The specification of each keyword is given below T
169. it under the constitution of the GNU GPL k k 3k ak 3k 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K K RI I I I I K K K K 21 21 21 21 21 21 25 21 25 25 25 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K A 3K 3K K K K 2K K K K dada e deb FK FK FK FK 2K K K K K FK FK FK 2K 2K 2K K K K K K ak gt K Read the scfout file fe2 scfout Previous eigenvalue solver Cluster atomnum 2 120 ChemP E_Temp 0 108015991530 Hartree 600 000000000000 K Evaluation of J based on cluster calculation Diagonalize the overlap matrix Diagonalize the Hamiltonian for spin 0 Diagonalize the Hamiltonian for spin 1 Specify two atoms e g 1 2 quit 00 12 J_ij between 1th atom and 2th atom is 848 136902053845 cm 1 Specify two atoms e g 1 2 quit 00 21 J_ij between 2th atom and 1th atom is 848 136902053844 cm 1 Specify two atoms e g 1 2 quit 00 00 Please specify two atoms you want to calculate the exchange coupling parameter until typing 0 0 121 37 Optical conductivity The functionality suffers from some program bugs The revised code will be released in future The optical conductivity can be evaluated within linear response theory 51 OpenMX Ver 3 7 supports the calculation for only the collinear cluster calculation If you want to calculate the optical conductivity of molecular systems you can calculate it by the following two steps 1 SCF calculation First you would perform a collinear cluster calculation using an input file Methane_OC dat in the direc
170. l as the eigenenergies and states from the disk file One should keep in mind that the outer window and k grid should be the same as those used for calculating the stored overlap matrix and eigenvalues Consistence will be checked in the code The inner window initial guess of MLWF as well as the convergence criteria can be adjusted for restarting optimization If Wannier Readin Overlap Matrix is set as off the overlap matrix will be calculated and automatically stored into a disk file The file name is defined by System Name with extension mmn The eigenenergies and states are also stored in the disk file with extension eigen 39 2 Analysis Plotting interpolated band structure To plot the interpolated band structure set Wannier Interpolated Bands to be on Wannier Interpolated Bands on onloff default off Other necessary settings like k path and sampling density along each path are borrowed from those for plotting band dispersion in OpenMX Therefore the keyword Band dispersion should be set as on in order to draw interpolated band structure After convergence interpolated band dispersion data will be found in a file with the extension name Wannier_Band which has the same format as Band file As an example the interpolated band structure of Si in diamond structure is shown together with its original band structure in Fig 35 a Plotting MLWF To plot the converged MLWFs
171. lation of matrix elements associated with difference charge Coulomb potential and exchange correlation potential and the solution of Poisson s equation using fast Fourier transform FFT The default is 150 Ryd scf Ngrid The keyword scf Ngrid gives the number of grids to discretize the a b and c axes Although scf energycutoff is usually used for the discretization the numbers of grids are specified by scf Ngrid they are used for the discretization instead of those by scf energycutoff scf maxIter The maximum number of SCF iterations is specified by the keyword scf maxIter The SCF loop is terminated at the number specified by scf maxIter even if a convergence criterion is not satisfied The default is 40 scf EigenvalueSolver The solution method for the eigenvalue problem is specified by the keyword scf EigenvalueSolver An O N divide conquer method DC an O N Krylov subspace method Krylov a numerically exact low order scaling method ON2 the cluster calculation Cluster and the band calculation Band are 27 available scf Kgrid When you specify the band calculation Band for the keyword scf EigenvalueSolver then you need to give a set of numbers n1 n2 n3 of grids to discretize the first Brillouin zone in the k space by the keyword scf Kgrid For the reciprocal vectors a b and in the k space please provide a set of numbers n1 n2 n
172. lculation For this calculation see also the Section Non collinear DFT Al 9 Basis sets 9 1 General OpenMX uses numerical pseudo atomic orbitals PAOs y as basis function to expand one particle Kohn Sham wave functions The PAO function is given by a product of a radial function R and a real spherical harmonic function Y as where the radial function R is a numerically defined one and finite within a cutoff radius in real space In other words the function R becomes zero beyond a pre defined cutoff radius The PAO function calculated by ADPACK is called primitive function and an optimized PAO function is obtained by the orbital optimization method in OpenMX starting from the primitive PAO function 28 They are stored in a file with a file extension of pao When the OpenMX calculation is performed the numerical data stored in the file are read and the value at any r is obtained by an interpolation technique The files with the file extension of pao should be stored in a directory e g DF T_DATA13 PAO where the directory without PAO can be specified by the following keyword DATA PATH DFT_DATA13 default DFT_DATA13 Both the absolute and relative specifications are possible and the default is DFT_DATA13 In an input file for the OpenMX calculation The basis set is specified by a keyword Defini tion of Atomic Species as follows lt Definition of Atomic Species H H5 0 s2p1 H_PBE13 C
173. lel calculation To see an overall tendency in the convergence properties of total energy with respect to the size of truncated cluster the error in the total energy compared to the exact diagonalization is shown as a function of the number of atoms in each cluster for a bulks with a finite gap b metals and c molecular systems in Fig 16 We see that the error decreases almost exponentially for the bulks with a finite gap and molecular systems while the convergence speed is slower for metals 20 2 Krylov subspace method The DC method is robust and accurate for a wide variety of systems However the size of truncated clusters to obtain an accurate result tends to be large for metallic systems as shown in Fig 16 A way of reducing the computational efforts is to map the original vector space defined by the truncated cluster into a Krylov subspace of which dimension is smaller than that of the original space 30 The Krylov subspace method is available by scf EigenvalueSolver Krylov Basically the accuracy and efficiency are controlled by the following two keywords orderN HoppingRanges 6 0 orderN KrylovH order 400 The keyword orderN HoppingRanges defines the radius of a sphere centered on each atom in the same sense as that in the DC method The dimension of the Krylov subspace of Hamiltonian in each truncated cluster is given by orderN KrylovH order Moreover the Krylov subspace method can be precisely tuned by th
174. les for generating MLW Fs Examples for different materials are prepared in the installation directory work wf_example e Benzene dat for generating six p orbital like Wannier functions from benzene s six m molecular orbitals e GaAs dat for generating maximally localized Wannier functions from four valence bands of GaAs e Si dat for generating eight Wannier functions by including both valence and conduction bands of Si The initial guess is sp3 hybrids e symGra dat for generating the Wannier function for graphene sheet The initial guess is sp2 hybrids and p orbitals on carbon atoms 148 e pmCVO dat for generating t2y like Wannier functions for cubic perovskite CaVO3 without spin polarization calculation NC_CVO dat similar to the case of pmCVO dat except for the inclusion of spin orbit coupling e GaAs_NC dat similar to the case of GaAs dat but spin orbit coupling is included VBz dat for generating Wannier functions for Vanadium Benzene infinite chain which is studied in Ref 58 39 5 Output files Additional four files generated by the calculation are explained below They have different extension names mmn file is for storing the overlap matrix elements MEP amn is for the initial guess projection matrix element AM eigen is for the eigenenergies and eigenstates at each k point The HWER file is for the hopping integrals among MLWFs on a set of lattice vectors whic
175. lication and the inverse calculation of matrix in the evaluation of the Green function are also parallelized by OpenMP In this case you can perform a hybrid parallelization by OpenMP MPI which may lead to shorter computational time The way for the parallelization is completely same as before In Fig 33 we show the speed up ratio in the elapsed time for the evaluation of the density matrix of 8 zigzag graphene nanoribbon ZGNR under a finite bias voltage of 0 5 eV The energy points of 197 101 and 96 for the equilibrium and nonequilibrium terms respectively are used for the evaluation 135 160 e 1 thread 120 4 2 threads S 4 threads Speed up ratio 00 o 40 0 20 40 60 Number of Processes Figure 33 Speed up ratio in the parallel computation of the calculation of the density matrix for the FM junction of 8 zigzag graphene nanoribbon ZGNR by a hybrid scheme using MPI and OpenMP The speed up ratio is defined by 71 T where T and Tp are the elapsed times by a single core and a parallel calculations The cores used in the MPI and OpenMP parallelizations are called process and thread respectively The parallel calculations were performed on a CRAY XT5 machine consisting of AMD opteron quad core processors 2 3GHz In the benchmark calculations the number of processes is taken to be equivalent to that of processors Therefore in the parallelization using 1 or 2 threads 3 or 2 cores are idle in a quad core proce
176. linear cases lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit AU 110 8 0 0950 0 0000 0 0000 0 0291 0 0000 0 0291 0 7062 0 0002 0 7063 0 0108 0 0062 0 0050 0 0000 0 0050 0 0069 0 0040 0 0157 0 0000 0 0157 16 1 0137 0 0000 Total Density of States 1 ev spin 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 Energy eV Figure 27 The total density of states for up spin in NiO bulk calculated with a U 0 eV and b U 4 eV in the LDA U method The input file is Crys NiO dat in the directory work 1 Ni 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 6 0 on 2 Ni 3 94955 3 94955 0 0 6 0 10 0 on 3 O0 3 94955 0 0 0 0 3 0 3 0 on 4 0 3 94955 3 94955 3 94955 3 0 3 0 on Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt For non collinear cases lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates Unit AU 1 Ni 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 6 0 40 0 10 0 0 on 2 Ni 3 94955 3 94955 0 0 6 0 10 0 40 0 10 0 O on 3 0 3 94955 0 0 0 0 3 0 3 0 10 0 40 0 O on 4 0 3 94955 3 94955 3 94955 3 0 3 0 10 0 40 0 O on Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The specification of each column can be found in the section Non collinear DFT Since the enhance ment treatment for the orbital polarization is performed on each atom you have to set the switch for all the atoms in the specification of atomic coordinates as given above The enhancement for the atoms switched on is applied during the first few self consistent SC steps then no more enhancement 111 are required during the subsequent SC steps It i
177. llelization for the O N Krylov subspace method can be realized by using the same number of MPI processes as that of atoms together with OpenMP threads Figure 18 shows that a system consisting of a hundred thousand atoms can be treated on a massively parallel computer 31 32 where the diamond structure consisting of 131072 carbon atoms is considered as a benchmark system Time Co 1400 Efficiency 100 lt 1200 7 S E 80 2 1000 T s o g 800 60 E m F 600 J 40 E 400 a 120 A 200 F 7 0 0 16384 32768 65536 131072 Total number of cores Figure 18 Parallel efficiency of the O N Krylov subspace method in the hybrid parallelization on the K computer where eight threads were used for all the cases The diamond structure consisting of 131072 carbon atoms was considered as a benchmark system 20 3 User definition of FNAN SNAN In all the O N methods supported by OpenMX Ver 3 7 neighboring atoms in each truncated cluster are classified into two categories first and second neighboring atoms If the sum ro ry of a cutoff radius ro Of basis functions allocated to the central atom and that ry of a neighboring atom is smaller than the distance between the two atoms then the neighboring atom is regarded as a first neighboring atom and the other atoms which does not satisfy the criterion in the truncated cluster are called the second neighboring atom The second neighboring atoms are
178. lysis e oi gerd amp a e a la b eee ome hale be le oe e a g 144 39 3 Monitoring Optimization of Spread Function 0 0 2 0 e 145 39 4 Examples for generating MLWFs o 148 39 5 Output files 0e 8 bab eed eae ae ee A Dae es BS we be ee 149 39 6 Automatic running test of MLWF 2 2 2 0 0 000 02 ee ee 152 40 Numerically exact low order scaling method for diagonalization 153 41 Effective screening medium method 155 AV eT General iea 20s e Oe ahve ee ke eee Se Ae a lia 155 41 2 Example of test calculation 2 2 ee ee 157 42 Nudged elastic band NEB method 159 42 1 General A yd OD ce she Se eel ls Bon an eee a he Rolls Renee te Os 159 42 2 How to perform a sonaa 4002 bbe eas kee ae A ee eG a ee ae 159 42 3 Examples and keywords ee ee 160 42 4 Restarting the NEB calculation 2 0 0 0 e 163 42 5 User defined initial path 2 ee eee 164 42 6 Monitoring the NEB calculation 2 0 20 0 0 000000 00200004 165 42 1 Parallel calculation izo yo ere ait cae Sock a ea a ag Se ee Bae G 165 AD 8 Other tips sla ooo rt QU Hansa OE de a Sore Ge yl O8 165 43 STM image by the Tersoff Hamann scheme 166 44 DFT D2 method for vdW interaction 167 45 Calculation of Energy vs lattice constant 169 45 1 Energy vs lattice constant 2 ooa ee ee 169 Al 2 Delta factor se iiia aii gh Ea ee sete bose thee oe a ea Sade Pe Siete oe ae amni 170 46 Fermi surface 171 47 Analysis of difference in two Gaus
179. m http www openmx square org forum patio cgi It is expected that the forum is utilized for sharing tips in use of OpenMX and for further code development Points of concern for use of this forum can be found in http www openmx square org forum note html 186 59 Others Program The program package is written in the C and F90 languages including one makefile makefile 21 header files exx_debug h exx_rhox h mimic_sse h exx_file_overlap h exx_vector h tran_prototypes h and 265 routines add_gcube c Allocate_Arrays c analysis_example c AngularF c Band_DFT_Col c Band_DFT_Dosout c Band_DFT_kpath c Band_DFT_MO c Band_DFT_NonCol c bandgnui3 c Bench_MatMul c BentNT c bin2txt c BroadCast_ComplexMatrix c BroadCast_ReMatrix c check_lead c Cluster_DFT c Cluster_DFT_Dosout c Cluster_DFT_ON2 c Cont_Matrix0 c Cont_Matrix1 c Cont_Matrix2 c Cont_Matrix3 c Cont_Matrix4 c Contract_Hamiltonian c Contract_iHNL c Cutoff c dampingF c deri_dampingF c DFT c DFTDvdW_init c diff_gcube c diff_geo c DIIS_Mixing_DM c DIIS_Mixing_Rhok c Divide_Conquer c Divide_Conquer_Dosout c exx_file_eri h exx_step2 h read_scfout h exx_index h 77func h exx h exx_xc h tran_variables h exx_log h lapack_prototypes h get_elpa_row_col_comms f90 Get_OneD_HS_Col c Get_Orbitals c GR_Pulay_DM c Hamiltonian_Band c Hamiltonian_Band_NC c Hamiltonian_Cluster c Hamiltonian_Cluster_NC c Hamiltonian_Cluster_S0 c init_alloc_fir
180. metrical coordinates in the cif format suited for Material Studio ene Values computed at every MD step The values are found in the routine iterout c In case of level of fileout 1 the following Gaussian cube files are generated in addition to files generated in level of fileout 0 In the following x is the file name specified by the keyword Sys tem Name tden cube Total electron density in a form of the Gaussian cube format sden cube If the spin polarized calculation using LSDA CA LSDA PW or GGA PBE is performed then spin electron density is output in a Gaussian cube format dden cube Difference electron density taken from superposition of atomic densities of constituent atoms in a form of the Gaussian cube format 38 e v0 cube The Kohn Sham potential excluding the non local potential for up spin in a Gaussian cube format e vl cube The Kohn Sham potential excluding the non local potential for down spin in a Gaussian cube format in the spin polarized calculation e vhart cube The Hartree potential in a Gaussian cube format In case of level of fileout 2 the following files are generated in addition to files generated in level of fileout 1 In the following is the file name specified by the keyword System Name e vxc0 cube The exchange correlation potential for up spin in a Gaussian cube format e vxcl cube The ex
181. mics by the Nose Hoover method 15 4 Multi heat bath molecular dynamics e 15 5 Constraint molecular dynamics oaoa 15 6 Initial velocity nai be ES Ge AE AA Re A AA A 15 7 User definition of atomic mass ooa 16 Visualization 17 Band dispersion 18 Density of states 18 1 Conventional scheme teca eee de a Re oe pk EO Re ae 18 2 For calculations with lots of k points 0 0 000002 2 eee 19 Orbital optimization 20 Order N method 20 1 Divide conquer method a 20 2 Krylov subspace Method ee 20 3 User definition of FNAN SNAN 0 0002 e 21 MPI parallelization Pil CGN calcula Ot A Be glean ae via Boece AA A o ai 21 2 Cluster Galewlation ita a e esd ae eke vet ee PR tne oes hue heads 21 3 Ba d calculati d 0 0 ee a De ee ee A 21 4 Fully three dimensional parallelization 0 o o e e 21 5 Maximum number of processors ee 52 52 54 54 56 56 56 57 58 58 59 60 61 62 62 62 63 64 65 65 66 67 68 71 71 73 75 80 80 83 85 22 OpenMP MPI hybrid parallelization 23 Large scale calculations 23 1 Conventional scheme 23 2 Combination of the O N and conventional schemes 00 24 Electric field 25 Charge doping 26 Virtual atom with fractional nuclear charge 27 LCAO coefficients 28 Charge analysis 281 Mulliken Charee s n o ia de te Go kha Gockel OR es a Ee ee ea ae Ee 28 2 VOF
182. n For example if scf Mixing History is specified to be 3 and when the SCF step is 6th the electron densities at 5 4 and 3 SCF steps are taken into account Around 30 is a better choice scf Mixing StartPulay The SCF step which starts the GR Pulay the RMM DIIS the Kerker and the RMM DIISK methods is specified by the keyword scf Mixing StartPulay The SCF steps before starting these Pulay type methods are then performed by the simple or Kerker mixing methods The default is 6 scf Mixing EveryPulay The residual vectors in the Pulay type mixing methods tend to become linearly dependent each other as the mixing steps accumulate and the linear dependence among the residual vectors makes the convergence difficult A way of avoiding the linear dependence is to do the Pulay type mixing oc casionally during the Kerker mixing With this prescription you can specify the frequency using the keyword scf Mixing EveryPulay For example in case of scf Mixing EveryPulay 5 the Pulay mixing is made at every five SCF iterations while the Kerker mixing is used at the other steps scf Mixing EveryPulay 1 corresponds to the conventional Pulay type mixing It is noted that the keyword scf Mixing EveryPulay is supported for only RMM DIISK and the default value is 1 scf criterion The keyword scf criterion specifies a convergence criterion Hartree for the SCF calculation The SCF iteration is ended when a co
183. n into account for the RMSD calculation Figure 44 shows vectors corresponding to the deviation of atomic coordinates in optimized structures and the difference of total charge density between a neutral and one electron doped glycine molecule We see that the large structural change seems to take place together with the large charge deviation This example illustrates that the tool would be useful when we want to know how the structure is changed by the charge doping and the electric field 174 49 Analysis of difference charge density induced by the interaction The redistribution of charge spin density induced by the interaction between two systems A and B can be analyzed by the following procedure i calculate the composite system consisting of A and B Then you will have a cube file for charge spin density Let it be AB cube Also you will find Grid Origin in the standard output which gives x y and z components of the origin of the regular grid as Grid_Origin xxx yyy zzz The values will be used in the following calculations ii and iii ii calculate the system A This calculation must be performed by the same calculation condition with the same unit cell as in the composite system consisting of A and B Also the coordinates of the system A must be the same as in the calculation i To use the same origin as in the calculation i rather than the use of an automatically determined origin you have to include the
184. n DFT Set_OLP_Kin 0 0 127 0 0 127 Set_Nonlocal 0 0 104 0 0 104 Set_ProExpn_VNA 0 0 132 0 0 132 Set_Hamiltonian 0 0 741 0 0 741 Poisson 0 0 351 0 0 351 Diagonalization 0 0 004 0 0 004 Mixing_DM 0 0 000 0 0 000 Force 0 0 200 0 0 200 Total_Energy 0 0 296 0 0 296 Set_Aden_Grid 0 0 022 0 0 022 Set_Orbitals_Grid 0 0 026 0 0 026 Set_Density_Grid 0 0 120 0 0 120 RestartFileDFT 0 0 003 0 0 003 Mulliken_Charge 0 0 000 0 0 000 FFT 2D _Density 0 0 000 0 0 000 Others 0 0 003 0 0 003 The files met tden cube met v0 cube met vhart cube and met dden cube are the total electron density the Kohn Sham potential the Hartree potential and the difference electron density taken from the superposition of atomic densities of constituent atoms respectively which are output in the Gaussian cube format Since the Gaussian cube format is one of well used grid formats you can visualize the files using free molecular modeling software such as Molekel 60 and XCrySDen 61 The visualization will be illustrated in the latter section 19 4 Automatic running test In addition to a running test of the Section Test calculation if you want to check whether most functionalities of OpenMX have been successfully installed on your computer or not we recommend for you to perform an automatic running test To do this you can run OpenMX as follows For the MPI parallel running mpirun np 8 openmx r
185. n by dQ AMY Q0 146 where n is the iteration number In the CG method only d_Omega is evaluated The criterion given by the keyword Wannier Minimizing Conv Criterion is applied to Modu of Gradient SPRD Monitor the variation of spread of the Wannier functions grep SPRD stdout std Opt Step Omega_I Omega_D Omega_0D Tot_Omega SD 1 16 93053479 0 13727387 6 57748455 23 64529321 SD 2 16 93053479 0 13724827 6 57696989 23 64475295 SD 3 16 93053479 0 13722279 6 57645620 23 64421378 SD 4 16 93053479 0 13719743 6 57594347 23 64367569 SD 199 16 93053479 0 13399285 6 48989479 23 55442243 SD 200 16 93053479 0 13398326 6 48950811 23 55402616 Opt Step Omega_I Omega_D Omega_0D Tot_Omega CG 1 16 93053479 0 15480701 6 14396737 23 22930917 CG 2 16 93053479 0 17172507 5 87830203 22 98056189 CG 3 16 93053479 0 17012089 5 78940789 22 89006357 CG 57 16 93053479 0 16557875 5 73752928 22 83364282 CG 58 16 93053479 0 16557876 5 73752928 22 83364282 CG 59 16 93053479 0 16557876 5 73752928 22 83364282 FECA AOA GAGGIA OAR gt SPRD CONVERGENCE ACHIEVED gt SPRD FEAR OBAGI oo oo k k k kk kk kk kkk gt SPRD where Opt Step is the optimization step in either SD or CG method in Angs 2 gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD gt SPRD
186. n by the keyword orderN KrylovS order orderN Recalc Buffer on off default on In case of orderN Recalc Buffer on the buffer matrix is recalculated at every SCF step Oth erwise the buffer matrix is calculated at the first SCF step and fixed at the subsequent SCF steps orderN Expand Core on off default on In case of orderN Expand Core on the core region is defined by atoms within a sphere with radius of 1 2 X rmin Where fmin is the distance between the central atom and the nearest atom The core region defines a set of vectors used for the first step in the generation of the Krylov subspace for each truncated cluster In case of orderN Expand Core off the central atom is considered as the core region The default is on It is better to switch on orderN Exact Inverse S and orderN Expand Core as the covalency increases while the opposite could becomes better in simple metallic systems In Fig 17 the absolute error in the 84 total energy calculated by the Krylov and DC methods are shown for a wide variety of materials It is found that in comparison with the DC method the Krylov subspace method is more efficient especially for metallic systems and that the efficiency become comparable as the covalency and ionicity in the electronic structure increase It is also noted that the O N Krylov subspace method is well parallelized to realize large scale calculations The most efficient para
187. n is given by DFTD rcut_dftD where the unit is given by DFTD Unit The d value in Eq 12 in Grimme s paper 86 is given by DFTD d while the default value is 20 The scaling factor in Eq 11 in Grimme s papar 86 is given by DFTD scale6 while the default value for the PBE func tional is 0 75 Also the interaction can be cut along the a b and c axes by DFTD IntDirection where 1 means that the interaction is included and 0 not Also the periodicity for each atom can be controlled by 167 lt DFTD periodicity 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 DFTD periodicity gt where the first column is a serial number which is the same as in the Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates and the second column is a flag which means that 1 is periodic and 0 is non periodic for the cor responding atom By considering the periodicity or non periodicity of each atom the interaction is automatically cut when they are non periodic The main modifications are placed at only two routines DFTDvdW _init c and Calc_EdftD of Total_Energy c In DFTDvdW init c you can easily change the parameters for the vdW correction and in Calc_EdftD of Total Energy c you can confirm how they are calculated Since OpenMX uses localized orbitals as basis function it is very important to take account of basis set superposition error BSSE when we investigate an effect of a weak interaction such as vdW interaction To estimate BSSE the counterpoise CP meth
188. n of Poisson s equation 29 Figure 4 shows the convergence of the total energy of a methane molecule with respect to the cutoff energy where the input file is Methane dat used in the Section Input file Since the cutoff energy is not for basis set as in plane wave methods but for the numerical integrations the total energy does not have to converge from the upper energy region with respect to the cutoff energy like that of plane wave basis set In most cases the cutoff energy of 150 200 Ryd is an optimum choice However it should be noted that there is a subtle problem which requires the cutoff energy more than 300 Ryd Calculations of a very flat potential minimum and a small energy difference among different spin orders could be such a subtle problem Structural parameters and the dipole moment of a water molecule calculated with a different cutoff energy are shown in Table 1 where the input file is H2O dat in the directory work A convergent result is obtained using around 90 Ryd Although a sufficient cutoff energy depends on elements 150 200 Ryd might be enough to achieve the convergence for most cases However we recommend that you would check physical properties for your system For the other cutoff energy 1DFFT EnergyCutoff we commonly use 3600 Ryd which is quite enough for the convergence with no high computational demands Cutoff energy Total energy Hartree Hartree 10 8 028581767049 l 00 O
189. nanotube 0 50 100 150 Number of Atoms in Each Cluster Figure 16 Error in the total energy of a bulks with a finite gap b metals and c molecular systems calculated by the divide conquer DC method as a function of the number of atoms in each cluster The dotted horizontal line indicates milli Hartree accuracy 82 If the number of atoms in the systems is N N small eigenvalue problems for the N physically truncated clusters are solved and then the total density of states DOS is constructed as the sum of the projected DOS of each physically truncated cluster Although the appropriate value for orderN HoppingRanges depends on systems for molecular systems the following values are recommended as a trade off between the computational accuracy and efficiency orderN HoppingRanges 6 0 7 0 Table 2 shows the comparison in the total energy between the exact diagonalization and the DC method for a Ceo molecule and small peptide molecules valorphin 63 and DNA consisting of cytosines and guanines We find that errors in the total energy calculated by the DC method are about a few mHartree in the system size Also it can be estimated that the DC method is faster than the conventional diagonalization when the number of atoms is larger than 500 atoms while the crossing point between the conventional diagonalization and the DC method with respect to computational time depends on systems and the number of processors in the paral
190. nclude a header file read_scfout h in your main routine if you want also in other routines as follows include read_scfout h 3 Call a function read_scfout in the main routine as follows read_scfout argv KKK KK K K FK OR K K FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K dl dd FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K K K K od K ak ok OK 178 52 Automatic force tester An effective way of assuring the reliability of implementation of many functionalities is to compare analytic and numerical forces If any program bug is introduced they will not be consistent with each other To do this one can run an automatic tester by For serial running openmx forcetest 0 For parallel running openmx forcetest O mpirun np 4 openmx where 0 is a flag to specify energy terms to be included in the consistency check and one can change 0 to 8 Each number corresponds to flag 0 Kinetic Non local Neutral atom diff Hartree Ex Corr E Field Hubbard U PP PP RP BP eB 1 O O O On On one 2 D O O O OOH o a e E o E e E OF OO O O O Ore O O 5 6 7 o oO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 4 OOOoOoOo Oo where 1 means that it is included in the force consistency check In a directory work force_example there are 36 test inputs which are used for the force consistency check After finishing the test a file forcetest result is generated in the directo
191. ndition dUele lt scf criterion is satisfied where dUele is defined as the absolute deviation between the eigenvalue energy at the current and previous SCF steps The default is 1 0e 6 Hartree scf Electric Field give The keyword scf Electric Field gives the strength of a uniform external electric field given by a sawtooth waveform For example when an electric field of 1 0 GV m 10 V m is applied along the a axis specify in your input file as follows scf Electric Field 1 0 0 0 0 0 default 0 0 0 0 0 0 GV m The sign of electric field is taken as that applied to electrons The default is 0 0 0 0 0 0 scf system charge The keyword scf system charge gives the amount of the electron and hole dopings The plus and minus signs correspond to hole and electron dopings respectively The default is 0 scf SpinOrbit Coupling 29 When the spin orbit coupling is included the keyword should be ON otherwise please set to OFF In case of the inclusion of the spin orbit coupling you have to use j dependent pseudopotentials See also the Section Relativistic effects as for the j dependent pseudopotentials 1D FFT 1DFFT Energy Cutoff The keyword 1DFFT EnergyCutoff gives the energy range to tabulate the Fourier transformed radial functions of pseudo atomic orbitals and of the projectors for non local potentials The default is 3600 Ryd 1DFFT NumGridK The keyword 1DFFT NumGridK gives the the
192. ng more than 100 cores for the parallel computation although it depends on the dimensionality of system 154 41 Effective screening medium method 41 1 General The effective screening medium ESM method is a first principles computational method for charged or biased systems consisting of a slab 81 82 83 84 In this method a 2 dimensional periodic and 1 dimensional optional boundary conditions are imposed on a model cell Fig 37 a and the Poisson s equation is solved under those set of boundary conditions by using the Green s function method An isolated slab charged slab and a slab under an uniform electric field can be treated by introducing the following combinations of semi infinite media ESMs a Isolated slab vacuum relative permittivity e 1 vacuum b Charged slab vacuum ideal metal relative permittivity 00 c Slab under an electric filed ideal metal ideal metal Here slab means a system consisting of molecules spaced out 2 dimensionally as well as a slab generally used as a surface model An isolated slab model can be used for investigations of a polarized substrate and charged slab model is applicable to a simulation of an electrode surface A slab model under an electric filed sandwiched between two ideal metal media would be appropriate for a material located in a metal capacitor In OpenMX a unit cell used in an ESM method calculation is constructed as follows see Fig 37 a
193. nput contraction coefficients used in the quasi Newton method EF and DIIS orbitalOpt SD step Steps before moving the quasi Newton method EF and DIIS is performed by the steepest de cent method The prefactor used in the steepest decent method is specified by the keyword or bitalOpt SD step In most cases orbitalOpt SD step of 0 001 can be a good prefactor orbitalOpt criterion The keyword orbitalOpt criterion specifies a convergence criterion Hartree borh for the orbital optimization The iterations loop is finished when a condition Norm of derivatives lt orbitalOpt criterion is satisfied CntOrb fileout If you want to output the optimized radial orbitals to files then the keyword CntOrb fileout must be ON Num CntOrb Atoms The keyword Num CntOrb Atoms gives the number of atoms whose optimized radial orbitals are output to files Atoms Cont Orbitals The keyword Atoms Cont Orbitals specifies the atom number which was given by the first column in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates for the output of optimized orbitals as follows lt Atoms Cont Orbitals 1 2 78 Atoms Cont Orbitals gt The beginning of the description must be lt Atoms Cont Orbitals and the last of the description must be Atoms Cont Orbitals gt The number of lines should be consistent with the number specified in the keyword Atoms Cont Orbitals For
194. ns Similarly one optimized radial function for the s p orbital is obtained from the linear combination of four primitive radial functions for C In addition the following keywords are set in the input file as follows orbital0pt Method species Off Species Atoms orbital0pt Opt Method EF DIIS EF orbitalOpt SD step 0 001 default 0 001 orbital0Opt HistoryPulay 30 default 15 orbitalOpt StartPulay 10 default 1 orbitalOpt scf maxIter 60 default 40 orbitalOpt Opt maxIter 140 default 100 orbitalOpt per MDIter 20 default 1000000 orbitalOpt criterion 1 0e 4 default 1 0e 4 CntOrb fileout on onloff default off Num CntOrb Atoms 2 default 1 lt Atoms Cont Orbitals 1 2 Atoms Cont Drbitals gt Then we execute OpenMX as openmx Methane_00 dat When the execution is completed normally you can find the history of orbital optimization in the file met_oo out as FRE AAA 3K 3K K K K K K K 2K aK aK 2K CC ACI A A A A 3K 3K K K K K K 21 K 21 K K K K 2 2 2 2 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K kk k ak ak 3k 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K CC ICI A A A A 3K 3K K K K K 21 21 21 21 25 21 25 21 2 2 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K History of orbital optimization MD 1 FOR ORRICK Gradient Norm Hartree borh 2 FAK 75 Required criterion 0 000100000000 FEA A ACR I I OK A kk I IKK a A 1 21 21 k k kkk k kk kk k kk kk k kk 2k k kk k iter 1 Gradient Norm 0 057098961101 Uele 3 217161102876 iter 2 Gradient Norm 0 04466846150
195. nsion is generated for each k point The correspondence between the numbers and the k points can be found in the file e current The file stores k resolved currents and its average for up and down spin states in units of ampere e conductance The file stores k resolved conductance at 0 K and its average for up and down spin states in units of quantum conductance Go i Thus the conductance G is proportional to the transmission T at the chemical potential of the left lead uz as follows e y G gt uL y As an example the k resolved transmission drawn by using the file conductance is shown in Fig 31 38 5 Periodic system under zero bias When the transmission of a system with the periodicity along the a axis as well as the periodicity of the bc plane is evaluated under zero bias voltage it can be easily obtained by making use of the Hamiltonian calculated by the conventional band structure calculation without employing the Green function method This scheme enables us to explore transport properties for a wide variety of possible geometric and magnetic structures with a low computational cost and thereby can be very useful for many materials such as superlattice structures The calculation is performed by adding a keyword NEGF Output for TranMain NEGF Output for TranMain on in the band structure calculation of the step 1 Then after the calculation of the step 1 you will obtain a file tr
196. od 33 34 can be used As for the CP method see the Section Empty atom scheme 168 45 Calculation of Energy vs lattice constant 45 1 Energy vs lattice constant The calculation of Energy vs lattice constant is supported by the following keywords MD Type EvsLC MD EvsLC Step 0 4 default 0 4 MD maxIter 32 default 1 When MD Type is set to EvsLC the total energy is calculated step by step by changing unit cell vectors a b and c The change of unit cell vectors is done uniformly by expanding them by a percentage where the reference is the initial vectors specified with MD EvsLC Step The number of steps is specified by the keyword MD maxIter After the calculation you will obtain a file EvsLC where is System Name The columns in the file EvsLC are arranged in order of az ay az br by bz Cx Cy Cz in A and the total energy in Hartree where a b c s a b c y and a b c are x y and z coordinates of the a b c vector respectively As an example calculation of Energy vs lattice for the fec Mn bulk is shown in Fig 42 where the equilibrium lattice constant and bulk modulus were evaluated by fitting the data to the Murnaghan equation of state with a code murn f provided on the web site 88 Mn6 0 s3p3d3 a 3 502 Ang B 280 GPa e Mn6 0 s3p3d3f1 ap 3 505 Ang By 277 GPa a 3 507 Ang B 280 GPa Functional GGA PBE Total Energy eV at
197. oji sp3 0 250 0 250 0 250 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 proji sp3 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Wannier Initial Projectors gt Each line contains the following items For example in the first line the species name projl is defined in pairing keywords Definition of Atomic Species is used to connect the projector name and the selected orbitals sp3 means the sp3 hybridized orbitals of this species is used as the initial guess of four target Wannier functions see also Table 6 for all the possible orbitals and their hybrids The projectors consisting of hybridized orbitals are centered at the position given by the following 3 numbers 0 25 0 25 0 25 which are given in unit defined by keyword Wannier Initial Projectors Unit to be explained below The next two sets of three numbers define the z axis and x axis of the local coordinate system respectively where each axis is specified by the vector defined by three components in xyz coordinate In this example in the first line the local z axis defined by 1 0 0 0 0 0 points to the opposite direction to the original x axis while the local x axis defined by 0 0 0 0 1 0 points to the opposite direction to the original z axis In the second line the local axes are the same as the original coordinate system The orbital used as projector can be the original PAOs or any hybrid of them One must be aware that the total number of projectors defined
198. olumn means MD steps and the second column gives interval of MD steps that the velocity scaling is made For the above example a velocity scaling is performed at every two MD steps until 100 MD steps at every 10 MD steps from 100 to 400 MD steps and at every 40 MD steps from 400 to 700 MD steps The third and fourth columns give a given temperature Tive K 62 and a scaling parameter q in the interval while the temperature in the interval is given by a linear interpolation In this velocity scaling velocity is scaled by T Teale Teiven Q Teale V ViXxs where Tyiven and Teal are a given and calculated temperatures respectively In NVT_VS the tem perature is calculated by using velocities of all the atoms On the other hand the local temperature is estimated by the velocity of each atom in NVT_VS2 and the velocity scaling is performed by the local temperature After the final MD step given in the specification MD TempControl the NVT ensemble is switched to a NVE ensemble Calculated quantities at every MD step are stored in an output file ene where means System Name Although you can find the details in iterout c several quantities are summarized for your convenience as follows MD step 2 MD time 14 kinetic energy of nuclear motion Ukc Hartree 15 DFT total energy Utot Hartree 16 Utot Ukc Hartree 17 Fermi energy Hartree 18 Given temperature for nucl
199. om 23 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Lattice constant Ang Figure 42 Total energy vs lattice constant for the fec Mn bulk calculated by the keyword EvsLC The input file used for the calculation is Mnfcc EvsLC dat in the directory work 169 45 2 Delta factor As well as EvsLC a similar functionality is provided as MD Type DF by which OpenMX automatically calculates the total energy of the system with volumes of 6 4 2 0 2 4 and 6 where the original structure given in the input file is taken to be the reference The regulation of volume is simply performed by considering uniform change of lattice vectors a b and c axes The volume and the corresponding total energy are output to a file DF The data can be used to calculate the delta factor proposed in Ref 27 170 46 Fermi surface The Fermi surface is visualized by XCrySDen 61 When you perform calculations of the density of states by the following keywords Dos fileout on onloff default off Dos Erange 20 0 20 0 default 20 20 Dos Kgrid 61 61 61 default Kgridi Kgrid2 Kgrid3 you will obtain a file FermiSurf0 bxsf where is System Name and the file can be visualized by XCrySDen 61 As well as Dos Fileout DosGauss fileout can be also used for the purpose In case of spin polarized calculations two files are generated as FermiSurf0 bxs and FermiSurfl bxs for spin up and spin down st
200. on absolute difference in the total energy and force is stored in a file runtestNEGF result in the directory work The reference results were calculated using 16 MPI processes of a 2 6GHz Xeon machine If the difference is within last seven digits we may consider that the installation is successful 138 39 Maximally Localized Wannier Function 39 1 General The following are descriptions on how to use OpenMX to generate maximally localized Wannier function MLWF 78 79 Keywords and settings for controlling the calculations are explained The style of keywords are closely following those originally in OpenMX Throughout the section a couple of results for silicon in the diamond structure will be shown for convenience The calculation can be traced by openmx code with an input file Si dat in work wf_example There is no additional post processing code After users may get the convergent result for the conventional SCF process for the electronic structure calculation the following procedure explained below will be repeated by changing a couple of parameters with the restart file until desired MLWFs are obtained To acknowledge in any publications by using the functionality the citation of the reference 58 would be appreciated Switching on generating MLWFs To switch on the calculation a keyword Wannier Func Calc should be explicitly set as on Its default value is off Wannier Func Calc on
201. onfirmed that OpenMX Ver 3 7 runs normally on the following machines e Sandy Bridge Xeon clusters e Opteron cluster e CRAY XC30 e Fujitsu FX10 e K at RIKEN 2 8 Tips for installation Most problems in installation of OpenMX are caused by the linking of LAPACK and BLAS or its alternative We would recommend users to link ACML and MKL in most cases while ACML seems to be slightly better than MKL with respect to computational speed and numerical stability Examples on how to link them can be found in makefile in the directory source Also we provide a couple of tips for the installation on popular platforms below OpenMX requires C and FORTRAN compilers LAPACK and BLAS libraries and FFT library In addition as the C compiler is used for linking the corresponding FORTRAN library of the compiler should be explicitly specified Here we provide some sample settings for installation on platforms with several popular 11 compilers and LAPACK and BLAS libraries with the assumption that the FFT library is installed in usr local fftw3 e Intel C and FORTRAN compilers icc ifort and the MKL library for LAPACK and BLAS MKLROOT opt intel mkl CC mpicc 03 xHOST openmp I usr local fftw3 include I SMKLROOT include FC mpiifort 03 xHOST openmp I MKLROOT include LIB L usr local fftw3 lib lfftw3 L SMKLROOT lib intel64 lmkl_intel_lp64 Imkl_intel_thread Imkl_core lpthread lifcore e PGI Cand FORTRAN compilers p
202. opotentials 2 20 21 23 variationally optimized pseudo atomic basis functions 28 fully and scalar relativistic treatment within pseudopotential scheme 10 19 13 e non collinear DFT 6 7 8 9 constraint DFT for non collinear spin and orbital orientation 11 macroscopic polarization by Berry s phase 12 Divide conquer DC method 37 and Krylov subspace method for O N eigenvalue solver Parallel eigensolver by ELPA 26 simple RMM DIIS 40 GR Pulay 39 Kerker 41 and RMM DIIS with Kerker s metric 40 charge mixing schemes e exchange coupling parameter 14 15 effective screening medium ESM method 81 84 scanning tunneling microscope STM simulation 52 nudged elastic band NEB method 53 charge doping uniform electric field e full and constrained geometry optimization electric transport calculations by a non equilibrium Green s function NEGF method 54 construction of maximally localized wannier functions e NVE ensemble molecular dynamics NVT ensemble molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling 17 and the Nose Hoover methods 18 Mulliken Voronoi and ESP fitting analysis of charge and spin densities analysis of wave functions and electron spin densities e dispersion analysis by the band calculation density of states DOS and projected DOS flexible data format for the input Interface to XCrySDen for visualizing data such as charge density 61 completely
203. oupling within the pseudopotential scheme can be included in the non collinear DFT calculations 10 19 13 while the inclusion of the spin orbit coupling is not supported in the collinear DFT calculation The inclusion of fully relativistic effects is made by the following two steps 1 Making of j dependent pseudopotentials First you are requested to generate j dependent pseudopotentials using ADPACK For your conve nience the j dependent pseudopotentials are available for many elements in the database Ver 2013 89 The details how to make the j dependent pseudopotential are found in the manual of ADPACK 2 SCF calculation If you specify j dependent pseudopotentials in the specification of lt Definition of Atomic Species it is possible to include spin orbit coupling by the following keyword scf SpinOrbit Coupling scf SpinOrbit Coupling on On Off default off X 2 a E i YER a A 2 Lar ee aoa oe ee ino Lae Y a T 7 EN a b ga eel L g x g x a x m g x Figure 26 Band structures of a bulk GaAs calculated by the non collinear DFT a without and b with the spin orbit coupling In these calculations Ga7 0 s2p2d2 and As7 0 s2p2d2 were used as a basis set and Ga_CA13 vps and As_CA13 vps were used for pseudopotentials which are stored in the database Ver 2013 For the exchange corr
204. ows diff_gcube AB cube A_B cube dAB cube The file dAB cube is the cube file for the difference charge spin density induced by the interaction where the difference means AB A_B 176 50 Automatic determination of the cell size When you calculate an isolated system you are required to provide a super cell so that the isolated system does not overlap with the image systems in the repeated cells The larger cell size can cause a numerical inefficiency since a larger number of grids are used in the solution of the Poisson s equation in this case Therefore the use of the minimum cell size is desirable in terms of computational efficiency OpenMX supports the requirement If you remove the specification for the cell size that is from lt Atoms Unit Vectors to Atoms Unit Vectors gt then OpenMX automatically determines an appropriate cell which does not overlap the next cells and fulfills the required cutoff energy The determined cell vectors are displayed in the standard output like this lt Set_Cluster_UnitCell gt automatically determined UnitCell Ang lt Set_Cluster_UnitCell gt from atomic positions and Rc of PAOs margin 10 00 lt Set_Cluster_UnitCell gt 6 614718 0 000000 0 000000 lt Set_Cluster_UnitCell gt 0 000000 6 041246 0 000000 lt Set_Cluster_UnitCell gt 0 000000 0 000000 6 614718 widened unit cell to fit energy cutoff Ang A 6 744142 0 000000 0 000000 48 B 0 000000 6 322633 0
205. pectively The beginning of the description must be lt MD TempControl and the last of the description must be MD TempControl gt The first number 4 gives the number of the following lines to control the temperature In this case you can see that there are four lines Following the number 4 in the con secutive lines the first and second columns give MD steps and a given temperature for nuclear motion The temperature between the MD steps is given by linear interpolation Although the same keyword MD TempControl as used in the velocity scaling MD is utilized in this specification it is noted that the format is different from each other In addition to the specification of MD TempControl you must specify a mass of heat bath by the following keyword NH Mass HeatBath 30 0 default 20 0 In this specification we use the unified atomic mass unit that the principal isotope of carbon atom is 12 0 Calculated quantities at every MD step are stored in an output file ene as explained in NVT molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling As an example we show a result for Nose Hoover MD of a glycine molecule in Fig 10 b We see that the temperature in the molecule oscillates around the y given temperature Also for visualization of molecular dynamics an output file md can be easily animated using free software such xmakemol 91 and XCrySDen 61 as well as NVT_VS 15 4 Multi heat bath molecular
206. pendence of the total energy and magnetic moment in a chromium dimer on the relative angle between two local spins is shown in Fig 28 You can trace the calculation using an input file Cr2 CNC dat in the directory work 174 5 174 51 Y 174 52 Y z I 174 53 9 z E 2 174 54 o O 3 e 174 55 174 56 174 57 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 Relative Angle 6 Figure 28 Total energy and magnetic moment of Cr atom for a chromium dimer of which bond length is 2 0 A The input file is Cr2 CNC dat in the directory work 113 34 Zeeman terms It is possible to apply Zeeman terms to spin and orbital magnetic moments 34 1 Zeeman term for spin magnetic moment The Zeeman term for spin magnetic moment is available as an interaction with a uniform magnetic field by the following keywords scf NC Zeeman Spin on onloff default off scf NC Mag Field Spin 100 0 default 0 0 Tesla When you include the Zeeman term for spin magnetic moment switch on the keyword scf NC Zeeman Spin The magnitude of the uniform magnetic field can be specified by the keyword scf NC Mag Field Spin in units of Tesla Moreover we extend the scheme as a constraint scheme in which the direc tion of the magnetic field can be different from each atomic site atom by atom Then the direc tion of magnetic field for spin magnetic moment can be controlled for example by the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates lt Atoms Sp
207. put to the file out in the same form as that of decomposed Mulliken populations which starts from the title Occupation Number in LDA U as follows KKK KK K FK FK FK FK K K K K dal K K K K K K 2K FK FK FK FK FK FK K ala Rd FK FK FK FK FK K K K K 2K 2K dol FK FK ok ak ok KKK K kK 2 2K FK FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK FK K 2 K K FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK ok K ok Occupation Number in LDA U and Constraint DFT Eigenvalues and eigenvectors for a matrix consisting of occupation numbers on each site FEA AA AAAI K K K K K aK K CC CC ICA A A A A 3K 3K K K K K 21 21 21 21 25 21 25 21 2 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 2K 2K KKK K K 2 2 FK FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K FK K K FK FK FK FK FK FK K 3K K K K dd 2K FK 2K FK ok K ak 109 1 Ni spin 0 Sum 8 591857905308 Individual s s px Py pz px Py pz d3z 2 r 2 dx 2 y72 dxy dxz dyz d3z 2 r 2 dx 2 y72 dxy dxz dyz Individual The eigenvalues of the occupation number matrix of each atomic site correspond to the occupation number to each local state given by the eigenvector The LDA U functional possesses multiple minima in the degree of freedom of the orbital occupation leading to that the SCF calculation tends to be trapped to some local minimum To find the ground state with an orbital polarization a way of e e AA AO Oo OO VO fF fF 4OoOoOQOoro 0 l oo O O O
208. ree at MD 1 Fell abla alabado lolo ljok Uele 3 889285101063 Ukin 5 533754016241 UHO 14 855520072374 UH1 0 041395625260 Una 5 040583803800 Unl 0 134640939010 UxcO 1 564720823137 Uxcl1 1 564720823137 Ucore 9 551521413583 Uhub 0 000000000000 Ucs 0 000000000000 Uzs 0 000000000000 Uzo 0 000000000000 Uef O 000000000000 UvdW 0 000000000000 Utot 8 033515406373 Note Utot Ukin UHO UH1 Una Un1 Uxc0 Uxc1 Ucore Uhub Ucs Uzs Uzo Uef UvdW Uene band energy Ukin kinetic energy UHO electric part of screened Coulomb energy UH1 difference electron electron Coulomb energy Una neutral atom potential energy Unl non local potential energy UxcO exchange correlation energy for alpha spin 15 Uxcl Ucore Uhub Ucs Uzs Uzo Uef UvdW exchange correlation energy for beta spin core core Coulomb energy LDA U energy constraint energy for spin orientation Zeeman term for spin magnetic moment Zeeman term for orbital magnetic moment electric energy by electric field semi empirical vdW energy see also PRB 72 045121 2005 for the energy contributions Chemical potential Hartree KKK KK 2 2K 2 FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK FK K K K FK FK FK FK FK FK K FK K K K K 2K 2K 2K 2K 2K FK 2K FK K ak OK 2 K K 2 2 FK FK RR K K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K FK K FK FK 2 FK FK FK K FK K K K K 2K 2K 2K FK 2K FK ok K ok ARO FK FK K K K K K K FK FK FK FK K K K
209. rence charge maps shown in Fig 22 o 10 GV m Sf Figure 22 Difference in the total charge density of a nitrobenzene molecule between the zero bias a axis voltage and a 10 GV m and b 10 GV m of applied bias along the a axis where orange and blue colors mean the increase and decrease of charge density Tilted arrows depict the slope of applied electric fields The input file is Nitro Benzene dat in the directory work 95 25 Charge doping The following keyword is available for both the electron and hole dopings scf system charge 1 0 default 0 0 The plus and minus signs correspond to hole and electron dopings respectively A partial charge doping is also possible The excess charge given by the keyword scf system charge is compensated by a uniform background opposite charge since FFT is used to solve Poisson s equation in OpenMX Therefore if you compare the total energy between different charged states a careful treatment is required because additional electrostatic interactions induced by the background charge are included in the total energy As an example we show spin densities of hole doped neutral and electron doped 5 5 carbon nanotubes with a finite length of 14 A in Fig 23 The neutral and electron doped nanotubes possess the total spin moment of 1 0 and 2 2 while the total spin moment almost disappears in the hole doped nanotube We can see that the spin polarization takes place
210. rostatic potentials for non polar systems while the difference can be large for polar systems The former is a proper choice in a sense that the eletrostatic potential at the boundaries between the leads and the central region should be the same as that in the calculations of the step 1 for the leads while the SCF convergence seems to be rather easily obtained by the latter The default is FD C SCF criterion In the NEGF method the SCF criterion given by the keyword scf criterion is applied to the residual norm between the input and output charge densities NormRD while in the other cases dUele is monitored See also the keyword NEGF scf Iter Band D Gate bias voltage In our implementation the gate voltage V x is treated by adding an electric potential defined by 0 pan where yo is a constant value corresponding to the gate voltage and is specified by the keyword NEGF gate voltage as follows NEGF gate voltage 1 0 default 0 0 in eV 130 e the center of the region Co and d the length of the unit vector along a axis for the region Co Due to the form of the equation the applied gate voltage affects mainly the region Co in the central region C The electric potential may resemble the potential produced by the image charges 57 E Density of States DOS In the NEGF calculation the density of states can be calculated by setting the following keywords Dos fileout on onloff default off
211. rsion mpirun np 1 openmx Methane dat nt 1 gt met std amp The test input file Methane dat is for performing the SCF calculation of a methane molecule with a fixed structure No MD The calculation is performed in only about 12 seconds by using a 2 6 GHz Xeon machine although it is dependent on a computer When the calculation is completed normally 11 files and one directory met std standard output of the SCF calculation met out input file and standard output met xyz final geometrical structure met ene values computed at every MD step met md geometrical structures at every MD step met md2 geometrical structure of the final MD step met cif cif file of the initial structure for Material Studio met tden cube total electron density in the Gaussian cube format met v0 cube Kohn Sham potential in the Gaussian cube format met vhart cube Hartree potential in the Gaussian cube format met dden cube difference electron density measured from atomic density met_rst directory storing restart files are output to the directory work The output data to a standard output is stored to the file met std which is helpful to know the computational flow of the SCF procedure The file met out includes computed results such as the total energy forces the Kohn Sham eigenvalues Mulliken charges the convergence history for the SCF calculation and analyzed computational time A part of the file met out is shown below
212. ry work You will see results of the comparison as follows force_example C2_GGA dat flag 0 Numerical force Utot s ds Utot s ds 2x ds ds 0 0003000000 Forces Hartree Bohr on atom 1 Analytic force Numerical force diff X y Zz 1 676203071292 1 397113794193 1 117456296887 1 676101156844 1 397036485449 1 117288361652 0 000101914447 0 000077308744 0 000167935235 force_example C2_LDA dat flag 0 Numerical force Utot s ds Utot s ds 2x ds 179 53 Automatic memory leak tester In OpenMX the memory used is dynamically allocated when it is required However the dynamic memory allocation causes often a serious memory leak which wastes the memory used as the MD steps increase To check the memory leak one can run OpenMX as follows For serial running openmx mltest For parallel running openmx mltest mpirun np 4 openmx By monitoring VSZ and RSS actually used at the same monitoring point in the program code for 13 test inputs in a directory work ml_example one can find whether the memory leak takes place or not After finishing the run a file mltest result is generated in the directory work You will see the monitored VSZ and RSS as a function of MD steps as follows 1 ml_example Co4 dat CPU VSZ kbyte RSS kbyte MD_iter 1 92 900 49756 15736 MD_iter 2 84 900 73344 57208 MD_iter 3 81 200 73344 57212 MD_iter 4 85 900 98672 82548 MD_iter 5 8
213. s also emphasized that the enhancement does not always give the ground state and that it can work badly in some case See Ref 16 for the details 112 33 Constraint DFT for non collinear spin orientation To calculate an electronic structure with an arbitrary spin orientation in the non collinear DFT OpenMX Ver 3 7 provides a constraint functional which gives a penalty unless the difference between the calculated spin orientation and the initial one is zero 11 The constraint DFT for the non collinear spin orientation is available by the following keywords scf Constraint NC Spin on onloff default off scf Constraint NC Spin v 0 5 default 0 0 eV You can switch on the keyword scf Constraint NC Spin and give a magnitude by scf Constraint NC Spin v which determines the strength of constraint when the constraint for the spin orientation is introduced The constraint is applied on each atom by specifying a switch as follows lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 Cr 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 7 0 5 0 20 0 0 0 1 off 2 Cr 0 00000 2 00000 0 00000 7 0 5 0 20 0 0 0 1 off Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt The 1 in the 10th column means that the constraint is applied and 0 no constraint The method constrains only the spin orientation Therefore the magnitude of spin can vary Also the constraint scheme is compatible with the LDA U calculation explained in the Section LDA U As an illustra tion of this method the de
214. s explicitly specified by the keyword the axis is discretized by the num ber without depending on the keyword scf energycutoff We see in Fig 5 that the fixed grids with 32x32x32 gives a smooth curve while the discontinuity is not so serious even in the cases of scf energycutoff 179 13 200 Ryd e 290 Ryd e Fixed 32x32x32 179 14 Total Energy Hartree N sexe 9 pue q e Buoje spud Jo JOQUINN 0 94 0 96 0 98 1 1 02 1 04 1 06 1 08 a a0 Figure 5 The total energy of bcc iron as a function of the lattice parameter where the experimental equilibrium lattice constant ag is 2 87 A A cubic unit cell including two atoms was considered The input file is Febcc2 dat in the directory work 50 11 3 Fixing the relative position of regular grid OpenMX Ver 3 7 uses the regular real space grid for the evaluation of Hamiltonian matrix elements associated with the Hartree potential by the difference charge density and exchange correlation po tential and solution of Poisson s equation Thus the total energy depends on the relative position between atomic coordinates and the regular grid When one calculates an interaction energy or energy curve as a function of atomic coordinates it is quite important to keep the relative position in all the calculations required for the evaluation of the interaction energy In the calculation for one of the structures you will find Grid_Origin
215. s is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under the constitution of the GNU GPL FO ORO E E E OR kkk kkk kk kk kk 2k 2k kk k FKK KK K 2 2 2 FK FK 3K K K 2g 2K Rd K K FK FK FK FK FK K K K K K K 2K 2K FK FK FK FK K K K K K K K K 2K OK OK Chemical potentials used in the SCF calculation Left lead 7 752843837400 eV Right lead 7 752843837400 eV NEGF current energy step 1 0000e 02 seems to be large for the calculation The recommended Tran current energy step is 0 0000e 00 eV Parameters for the calculation of the current lower bound 7 752843837400 eV upper bound 7 752843837400 eV energy step 0 010000000000 eV imginary energy 0 001000000000 eV number of steps 0 calculating myid0 0 i2 0 i3 0 k2 0 0000 k3 0 0000 Transmission files negf chain tran0_0 Current file negf chain current Conductance file negf chain conductance 132 After the calculation in this case you will obtain three files negf chain tran0_0 negf chain current and negf chain conductance e tran The file stores transmissions for up and down spin states The fourth column is the energy rela tive to the chemical potential of the left lead and the sixth and eighth columns are transmission for up and down spin states respectively When you employ a lot of k points which is given by NEGF tran Kegrid a file with a different set of and in the file exte
216. s scheme could be quite convenient As well as atoms the optimized radial functions are independent of the magnetic quantum number which guarantees the rotational invariance of the total energy Although the same information is available in the section Input file for convenience the details of the other keywords are listed below 77 orbitalOpt scf maxIter The maximum number of SCF iterations in the orbital optimization is specified by the keyword or bitalOpt scf maxlter orbitalOpt Opt maxIter The maximum number of iterations for the orbital optimization is specified by the keyword or bitalOpt Opt maxlter The iteration loop for the orbital optimization is terminated at the number specified by orbitalOpt Opt maxIter even when a convergence criterion is not satisfied orbitalOpt Opt Method Two schemes for the optimization of orbitals are available EF which is an eigenvector following method DIIS which is the direct inversion method in iterative subspace The algorithms are ba sically same as for the geometry optimization Either EF or DIIS is chosen by the keyword or bitalOpt Opt Method orbitalOpt StartPulay The quasi Newton method EF and DIIS starts from the optimization step specified by the keyword orbitalOpt Start Pulay orbitalOpt HistoryPulay The keyword orbitalOpt HistoryPulay specifies the number of previous steps to estimate the next i
217. s that 1 4 and 2 0 are ist and 2nd scale factors In the ESP fitting method we support two constraints charge conservation and charge and dipole moment conservation Although the latter can reproduce charge and dipole moment calculated by the DFT calculation it seems that the introduction of the dipole moment conservation gives often physically unacceptable point charges especially for a relatively large molecule Thus we would like to recommend the former constraint The sampling points are given by the grids in real space between two shells of the first and second scale factors times van der Waals radii 68 In the above example 1 4 and 2 0 correspond to the first and second scale factors The calculated result appears in the standard output your display as follows 101 esp met c O s 1 4 2 0 k k ak ak ak 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K K K K K K K K aK ak ak I 3K I I I I I I Ik K 21 21 21 21 21 21 K 21 25 25 25 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K 2K K k k ak ak 3k 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K aK aK 2K ak CII I I I I I 3K K 1 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 25 25 3K 3K 3K 3K A 3K 3K a K K K K K esp effective charges by a ESP fitting method Copyright C 2004 Taisuke Ozaki This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under the constitution of the GNU GPL BREA AA 3K K K K K aK K 2K aK aK 2k 2K 3K 3k 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K I I I I I K K 21 21 21 21 21 25 21 21 K 21 25 25 25 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K 3K K K K K K DK 2 K K 2 2 FK FK FK K K K K
218. s the algorithm in the parallelization is changed to the efficient scheme As well as the cluster calculation OpenMX Ver 3 7 employs ELPA 26 to solve the eigenvalue problem in the band calculation which is a highly parallelized eigevalue solver 88 21 4 Fully three dimensional parallelization OpenMX Ver 3 7 supports a fully three dimensional parallelization for data distribution while up to and including Ver 3 6 the parallelization is made by a simple one dimensional domain decomposition for a axis of the unit cell for data distribution Thus users do not need to care about how unit cells are specified to achieve good road balancing In OpenMX Ver 3 7 a nearly equivalent parallel efficiency will be obtained without depending on choice of the unit cell vectors 21 5 Maximum number of processors Up to and including Ver 3 6 the number of MPI processes that users can utilize for the parallel calculations is limited up to the number of atoms in the system OpenMX Ver 3 7 does not have the limitation Even if the number of MPI processes exceeds the number of atoms the MPI parallelization is efficiently performed The functionality may be useful especially for a calculation where the number of k points is much larger than the number of atoms in the system 89 22 OpenMP MPI hybrid parallelization The OpenMP MPI hybrid parallel execution can be performed by mpirun np 32 openmx DIA512 1 dat nt 4 gt dia512 1 std Y where
219. sian cube files 172 48 Analysis of difference in two geometrical structures 173 49 Analysis of difference charge density induced by the interaction 175 50 Automatic determination of the cell size 177 51 Interface for developers 178 52 Automatic force tester 179 53 Automatic memory leak tester 54 Analysis of memory usage 55 Output of large sized files in binary mode 56 Examples of the input files 57 Known problems 58 OpenMX Forum 59 Others 180 182 183 184 185 186 187 1 About OpenMX OpenMX Open source package for Material eXplorer is a software package for nano scale mate rial simulations based on density functional theories DFT 1 norm conserving pseudopotentials 19 20 21 22 23 and pseudo atomic localized basis functions 28 The methods and algorithms used in OpenMX and their implementation are carefully designed for the realization of large scale ab initio electronic structure calculations on parallel computers based on the MPI or MPI OpenMP hy brid parallelism The efficient implementation of DFT enables us to investigate electronic magnetic and geometrical structures of a wide variety of materials such as biological molecules carbon based materials magnetic materials and nanoscale conductors Systems consisting of 1000 atoms can be treated using the conventional diagonalization method if several hundreds cores on a parallel computer are used Even ab initio electronic structure calculations for sy
220. site full dual default dual Among three occupation number operators only the dual operator satisfies a sum rule that the trace of occupation number matrix gives the total number of electrons which is the most primitive conserved quantity in a Hubbard model For the details of the operators onsite full and dual see Ref 16 The effective U value in eV on each orbital of species defined by lt Definition of Atomic Species Ni Ni6 0S s2p2d2 Ni_CA135 O 05 0 s2p2d1 O_CA13 Definition of Atomic Species gt is specified by lt Hubbard U values eV Ni s 0 0 2s 0 0 ip 0 0 2p 0 0 1d 4 0 2d 0 0 0 1s 0 0 2s 0 0 1p 0 0 2p 0 0 1d 0 0 Hubbard U values gt The beginning of the description must be lt Hubbard U values and the last of the description must be Hubbard U values gt For all the basis orbitals you have to give an effective U value in eV in the above format The 1s and 2s mean the first and second s orbital and the number behind 1s is the effective U value for the first s orbital The same rule is applied to p and d orbitals As an example of the LDA U calculation the density of states for a nickel monoxide bulk is shown for cases with an effective U value of 0 and 4 eV for d orbitals of Ni in Fig 27 where the input file is Crys NiO dat in the directory work We see that the gap increases due to the introduction of a Hubbard term on the d orbitals The occupation number for each orbital is out
221. specify the compiler and libraries by CC FC and LIB The default for the specification of CC and LIB in makefile is as follows CC mpicc Dnoomp 03 I usr local include FC LIB mpif90 Dnoomp 03 I usr local include L usr local lib lfftw3 llapack lblas lg2c static CC and FC are the specification for C and FORTRAN compilers respectively and LIB is the specification for libraries which are linked Although the specification of FC is not required up to and including Ver 3 6 FC must be specified in Ver 3 7 due to the introduction of the ELPA based parallel eigensolver 26 The option Dnoomp should be added under environment that OpenMP is not available You need to set the CC FC and LIB appropriately on your computer environment so that the compilation and linking can be properly performed and the executable file can be well optimized while the specification largely depends on your computer environment After specifying CC FC and LIB appropriately then install as follows make install When the compilation is completed normally then you can find the executable file openmx in the directory work To make the execution of OpenMX efficient you can change a compiler and compile options appropriate for your computer environment which can generate an optimized executable file Several examples for CC FC and LIB can be found in makefile in the directory source for your convenience 2 4 OpenM
222. ssor of the density matrix Only the I point is employed for the k point sampling and the spin polarized calculation is performed Thus the combination of 394 for the three indices are parallelized by MPI It is found that the speed up ratio of the flat MPI parallelization corresponding to 1 thread reasonably scales up to 64 processes Furthermore it can be seen that the hybrid parallelization corresponding to 2 and 4 threads largely improves the speed up ratio By fully using 64 quad core processors corresponding to 64 processes and 4 threads the speed up ratio is about 140 demonstrating the good scalability of the NEGF method For the details see also Ref 54 It should be also noted that the number of processes in the MPI parallelization can exceed the number of atoms in OpenMX Ver 3 7 38 8 NEGF method for the non collinear DFT OpenMX Ver 3 7 supports the NEGF method coupled with the non collinear DFT method which can be regarded as a full implementation of NEGF within NC DFT The spin orbit coupling the DFT U method and the constraint schemes to control direction of spin and orbital magnetic moments supported for NC DFT are all compatible with the implementation of the NEGF method Thus it is expected that a wide variety of problems can be treated such as transport through magnetic domains with spiral magnetic structure The usage of the functionality is basically the same as that for the collinear DFT case Only the difference b
223. st c init c Initial_CntCoes2 c Initial_CntCoes c Init_List_YOUSO c Input_std c Inputtools c io_tester c iterout c iterout_md c jx c Kerker_Mixing_Rhok c Krylov c KumoF c lapack_dstedc1 lapack_dstedc2 lapack_dstedc3 lapack_dstegr1 lapack_dstegr2 lapack_dstegr3 lapack_dsteqr1 lapack_dstevxl lapack_dstevx2 lapack_dstevx3 0000000000000 0 0 lapack_dstevx4 lapack_dstevx5 c Lapack_LU_inverse c LU_inverse c 187 exx_interface_openmx h Inputtools h exx_def_openmx h exx_step1 h openmx_common h SCF2File c Set_Aden_Grid c Set_Allocate_Atom2CPU c Set_Density_Grid c Set_Hamiltonian c Set_Initial_DM c Set_Nonlocal c Set_OLP_Kin c Set_Orbitals_Grid c SetPara_DFT c Set_ProExpn_VNA c Set_Vpot c Set_XC_Grid c Show_DFT_DATA c Simple_Mixing_DM c Smoothing _Func c solve_evp_complex f90 solve_evp_real f90 Spherical_Bessel c test_mpi2 c test_mpi3 c test_mpi4 c test_mpi c test_openmp2 c test_openmp3 c test_openmp c Tetrahedron_Blochl c Timetool c Total_Energy c TRAN_Add_ADensity_Lead c TRAN_Add_Density_Lead c TRAN_adjust_Ngrid c TRAN_Allocate c TRAN_Allocate_NC c TRAN_Apply_Bias2e c TRAN_Calc_CentGreen c TRAN_Calc_CentGreenLesser c DosMain c Make_Comm_Worlds c TRAN_Calc_GridBound c Dr_KumoF c Make_FracCoord c TRAN_Calc_Hopping_G c Dr_RadialF c Make_InputFile_with_FinalCoord c TRAN_Calc_OneTransmission c Dr_VH_AtomF c Maketest c TRAN_Calc_SelfEnergy c Dr_VNAF c malloc_multidimarr
224. st of data have been already copied in the distributed package of OpenMX Ver 3 7 You can freely utilize these data in terms of GNU GPL but we cannot offer any warranty on these data The assignation of pseudopotentials can be made using a keyword Definition of Atomic Species as in the case of specification of basis functions as follows lt Definition of Atomic Species H H6 0 s2p1 H_CA13 C C6 0 s2p2 C_CA13 Definition of Atomic Species gt The pseudopotential file can be specified in the third column and the file must be existing in the directory DFT_DATA13 VPS In the specification of atomic coordinates it is required to give the number of electrons for up and down spin states for each atom as follows lt Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates 1 C 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 2 0 2 0 2 H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 3 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 4 H 0 000000 0 629312 0 889981 0 5 0 5 5 4H 0 889981 0 629312 0 000000 0 5 0 5 Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates gt where the sixth and seventh columns give the number of initial charges for up and down spin states for each atom respectively The sum of up and down charges for the atomic element should be equivalent to the number of electrons which is taken into account in the pseudopotential generation Then the proper number for each pseudopotential can be found in the pseudopotential file vps For example you will see the following line in the file C_PBE13 vps
225. stems consisting of more than 10000 atoms are possible with the O N method implemented in OpenMX if several thousands cores on a parallel computer are available Since optimized pseudopotentials and basis functions which are well tested are provided for many elements users may be able to quickly start own calculations without preparing those data by themselves Considerable functionalities have been implemented for calcula tions of physical properties such as magnetic dielectric and electric transport properties Thus we expect that OpenMX can be a useful and powerful theoretical tool for nano scale material sciences leading to better and deeper understanding of complicated and useful materials based on quantum mechanics The development of OpenMX has been initiated by the Ozaki group in 2000 and from then onward many developers listed in the top page of the manual have contributed for further de velopment of the open source package The distribution of the program package and the source codes follow the practice of the GNU General Public License GPL 59 and they are downloadable from http www openmx square org Features and capabilities of OpenMX Ver 3 7 are listed below e total energy and forces by cluster band O N and low order scaling methods e local density approximation LDA LSDA 2 3 4 and generalized gradient approximation GGA 5 to the exchange correlation potential e LDA U methods 16 e norm conserving pseud
226. tals HOMOs that you want to output to files num LUMOs The keyword num LUMOs gives the number of the lowest unoccupied molecular orbitals LUMOs that you want to output to files MO Nkpoint When you have specified MO fileout ON and scf EigenvalueSolver Band the keyword MO Nkpoint gives the number of the k points at which you output MOs to files MO kpoint The keyword MO kpoint specifies the k point at which MOs are evaluated for the output to files as follows lt MO kpoint 0 0 0 0 0 0 MO kpoint gt The beginning of the description must be lt MO kpoint and the last of the description must be MO kpoint gt The k points are specified by nl n2 n3 which is spanned by the reciprocal lattice vectors where the the reciprocal lattice vectors are determined in the same way as Band kpath DOS and PDOS Dos fileout If you want to evaluate density of states DOS and projected partial density of states PDOS please set in Dos fileout ON 36 Dos Erange The keyword Dos Erange determines the energy range for the DOS calculation as Dos Erange 10 0 10 0 The first and second values are the lower and upper bounds of the energy range eV for the DOS calculation respectively Dos Kgrid The keyword Dos Kgrid gives a set of numbers n1 n2 n3 of grids to descretize the first Brillouin zone in the k space which is used in the DOS calculation Interface for developers
227. tep and fixed at subsequent SCF steps The default is on onloff orderN Expand Core In case of orderN Expand Core on the core region is defined by atoms within a sphere with radius of 1 2 X rmin where fmin is the distance between the central atom and the nearest atom The core regsion defines a set of vectors used for the first step in the generation of the Krylov subspace for each truncated cluster In case of orderN Expand Core off the central atom is considered as the core region The default is on onloff MD or Geometry Optimization MD Type Please specify the type of the molecular dynamics calculation or the geometry optimization Currently NO MD Nomd MD with the NVE ensemble NVE MD with the NVT ensemble by a velocity scal ing scheme NVT_VS 17 MD with the NVT ensemble by a Nose Hoover scheme NVT_NH 18 MD with multi heat bath NVT_VS2 or NVT_VS4 the geometry optimization by the steepest decent SD method Opt DIIS optimization method DHS the eigenvector following EF method EF 45 and the rational function RF method RF 46 are available For the details see the Sections Geometry optimization and Molecular dynamics MD Fixed XYZ 32 In the geometry optimization and the molecular dynamics simulations it is possible to separately fix the x y and z coordinates of the atomic position to the initial position in your input file by the following keyword lt
228. the FORTRAN library is unknown to the C compiler resulting in the following link errors usr bin ld cannot find lifcore with the Intel compiler 12 usr bin ld cannot find lpgf90 with the PGI compiler or lpgf90_rpm1 1pgf902 lpgf90rt1 lpgftnrtl as the pgf90libs flag is just a shortcut for them usr bin ld cannot find lgfortran with the GNU compiler To solve this link time problem the location of the FORTRAN library must be explicitly spec ified as follows First the location of the FORTRAN compiler can be identified with the following commands which ifort with the Intel compiler opt intel fce 10 0 026 bin ifort which pgf90 with the PGI compiler opt pgi linux86 64 7 0 bin pgf90 which gfortran with the GNU compiler usr bin gfortran Then the location of the FORTRAN library usually resides in lib of the parent folder of bin and must be specified in LIB LIB L opt intel fce 10 0 026 lib lifcore with the Intel compiler LIB L opt pgi linux86 64 7 0 lib pgf90libs with the PGI compiler LIB L usr lib lgfortran with the GNU compiler 13 3 Test calculation If the installation is completed normally please move to the directory work and perform the program openmx using an input file Methane dat which can be found in the directory work as follows mpirun np 1 openmx Methane dat gt met std amp Or if you use the MPI OpenMP ve
229. the atomic element When you calculate spin polarized systems using LSDA CA or LSDA PW you can give the initial spin charges for each atom which might be those of the ground state to accelerate the SCF convergence 25 Atoms Unit Vectors Unit The unit of the vectors for the unit cell is specified by the keyword Atoms Unit Vectors Unit Please specify Ang when you use the unit of Angstrom and AU when the unit of atomic unit Atoms Unit Vectors The vectors a b and c of the unit cell are given by the keyword Atoms UnitVectors as follows lt Atoms UnitVectors 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 Atoms UnitVectors gt The beginning of the description must be lt Atoms UnitVectors and the last of the description must be Atoms UnitVectors gt The first second and third rows correspond to the vectors a b and c of the unit cell respectively If the keyword is absent in the cluster calculation a unit cell is automatically determined so that the isolated system cannot overlap with the image systems in the repeated cells See also the Section Automatic determination of the cell size SCF or Electronic System scf XcType The keyword scf XcType specifies the exchange correlation potential Currently LDA LSDA CA LSDA PW and GGA PBE are available where LSDA CA is the local spin density functional of Ceperley Alder 2 LSDA PW is the local sp
230. the history of optimization and change of total energy along MEP as shown in Fig 40 42 4 Restarting the NEB calculation It often happens that the convergence is not achieved even after the maximum optimization step In such a case one has to continue the optimization as a new job starting from the last optimization step in the previous job A file dat is generated after every optimization step The file contains a 163 a iol 33 382 i T rt 8 pan E l 2 T E 10 E 8 gt 33 384 gt D a 10 F E E 3 E Be E 33 386 4 10 F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 10 20 30 0 5 Optimization Step Distance from the precursor bohr Figure 40 a History of optimization si8_neb neb opt for the NEB calculation for diffusion of an interstitial hydrogen atom in the diamond Si b change of total energy si8_neb neb ene as a function of the distance Bohr from the precursor and the corresponding geometrical structures si8_neb neb xyz of images on the minimum energy path The input file used for the NEB calculation is Si8_ NEB dat in the directory work series of atomic coordinates for images in the last step One can restart the optimization using a file dat 42 5 User defined initial path As default the initial path connecting the precursor and the product is a straight line connecting them However in some cases the geometrical structure of images generated on the strai
231. the most recommended prescription to accelerate the convergence is the following e Increase of scf Mixing History A relatively larger vaule 30 50 may lead to the convergence In addition scf Mixing EveryPulay should be set in 1 Since the Pulay type mixing such as RMM DIIS and RMM DIISK is based on a quasi Newton method the convergence speed is governed by how a good approximate Hessian matrix can be found As scf Mixing History increases the calculated Hessian may become more accurate In Fig 6 a comparison of five mixing schemes is shown for the SCF convergence for a a sialic acid molecule b a Pt 3 cluster and c a Ptg3 cluster where the norm of residual density matrix or charge density can be found as NormRD in the file out and the input files are SialicAcid dat Pt13 dat and Pt63 dat in the directory work We see that RMM DIISK works with robustness for all the systems shown in Fig 6 In most cases RMM DIISK will be the best choice while the use of Kerker is required with a large scf Kerker factor and a small scf Max Mixing Weight for quite difficult cases in which the convergence is hardly obtained 12 2 Automatic determination of Kerker s factor If the keyword scf Kerker factor is not given in your input file OpenMX Ver 3 7 automatically estimates a proper value of Kerker s factor a by the following equation 0 5 Dq a 4
232. the right lead and the chemical potential wp of ie right lead by k k k Hye Myc 1 A Hye He EDAD HR wy where the indices 1 and 2 in the superscript mean that the quantities are calculated or used at the corresponding bias voltages where the SCF calculations are performed beforehand In general A should range from 0 to 1 for the moderate interpolation In the calculation of the step 3 the interpolation is made by adding the following keywords in the input file NEGF tran interpolate on default off onloff NEGF tran interpolate filei ci negf 0 5 tranb 134 L a E e SCF o SCF 1207 A Interpolation 1 3 Spo ee Interpolation a Ja lt x E 80 4 2 2 2 T E 40 J 5 1 7 0 02 04 06 08 1 03 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 Vb V Energy eV Figure 32 a Currents of the linear carbon chain calculated by the SCF calculations solid line and the interpolation scheme dotted line b Transmission of the linear carbon chain under a bias voltage of 0 3 V calculated by the SCF calculations solid line and the interpolation scheme dotted line The imaginary part of 0 01 and the grid spacing of 0 01 eV are used for the integration of the nonequilibrium term in the density matrix NEGF tran interpolate file2 ci negf 1 0 tranb NEGF tran interpolate coes 0 7 0 3 default 1 0 0 0 When you perform the interpolation the keyword NEGF tran interpolate should be on In this
233. this case note that the total charge of a calculation system should be neutral The keyword scf system charge should be set to be Zero ESM switch on2 Both ESM I and II are semi infinite ideal metal media One can deal with charged systems The keyword scf system charge can be set to be a finite value ESM switch on3 ESM I and II are a semi infinite vacuum and ideal metal medium respectively One can deal with charged systems The keyword scf system charge can be set to be a finite value ESM switch on4 An electric field is imposed on the system with the same combination of ESMs to on2 By using the following keyword one can impose a uniform electric field on a calculation system ESM potential diff 1 0 default 0 0 eV where one inputs a potential difference between two semi infinite ideal metal media with reference to the bottom ideal metal unit is eV The electric filed is decided by the length of the cell a and the potential difference In case of MD calculations with the ESM method One can implement MD calculations of solid surface liquid interface systems with any com binations of ESMs A surface model slab and a liquid region should be located as shown in Fig 37 b In order to restrict liquid molecules within a given region an cubic barrier potential can be introduced by using the following keyword see Fig 37 b 156 Pex GH electron A
234. ting is observed in Fig 26 a The spin orbit splittings at two k points T and L are listed together with the other calculations and experimental values in Table 3 We see a good agreement in this table 30 2 Scalar relativistic treatment A simple way to incorporate a scalar relativistic treatment is to use scalar relativistic pseudopoten tials which can be generated by ADPACK The another way is to use fully relativistic j dependent pseudopotentials and to switch off the keyword scf SpinOrbit Coupling as follows scf SpinOrbit Coupling off On Off default off Then the j dependent pseudopotentials are automatically averaged with a weight of j degeneracy when they are read by OpenMX which corresponds to scalar relativistic pseudopotentials So once j dependent pseudopotentials are generated you can utilize the pseudopotentials for both the fully and scalar relativistic treatments Thus we recommend that you make a fully relativistic j dependent pseudopotential rather than a scalar relativistic pseudopotential when relativistic effects are taken into account In fact the calculation in Fig 26 a was performed using the same pseudopotential as in Fig 26 b with scf SpinOrbit Coupling off 106 31 Orbital magnetic moment The orbital magnetic moment at each atomic site is calculated as default in the non collinear DFT Since the orbital magnetic moment appears as a manifestation of spin orbit coupling SOC the calculated
235. tivated contributors who want to develop the open source codes are always welcome 2 Installation 2 1 Including libraries OpenMX can be installed under linux environment where three library packages are available as listed below e LAPACK and BLAS http www netlib org e FFTW http www fftw org e MPI library such as MPICH2 and OpenMPI If these library packages are not installed on your machine you are required to install them before the installation of OpenMX Note that a MPI library such as MPICH2 and OpenMPI has to be available for the installation of OpenMX Ver 3 7 Without a MPI library OpenMX Ver 3 7 cannot be installed If these libraries packages are available on your machine you can proceed the following procedure for the installation Then after downloading openmx3 7 tar gz decompress it as follows tar zxvf openmx3 7 tar gz When it is completed you can find three directories source work DFT_DA TA13 under the di rectory openmx3 7 The directories source work and DFT_DATA13 contain source files input files and data files for optimized pseudo atomic basis functions and pseudopotentials of Ver 2013 respectively 2 2 Serial version The installation of the serial version is not supported for OpenMX Ver 3 7 2 3 MPI version To proceed the installation of the MPI version move to the directory source and modify makefile in source to
236. toms 240 orbitals Conventional 343 89680 36 DC 7 0 2 343 89555 37 Valorphin 125 atoms 317 orbitals Conventional 555 28953 81 DC 6 5 2 555 29019 76 DNA 650 atoms 1880 orbitals Conventional 4090 95463 576 DC 6 3 2 4090 95092 415 Then one can execute OpenMX by openmx DIA8_DC dat The input file is for an O N calculation 1 MD step of the diamond including 8 carbon atoms The computational time is 120 seconds using a Xeon machine 2 6 GHz Figure 15 shows the computational time and memory size to calculate a MD step of the carbon diamond as a function of number of atoms in the supercell In fact we see that the computational time and memory size are almost proportional to the number of atoms The accuracy and efficiency of the DC method are controlled by a single parameter orderN HoppingRanges e orderN HoppingRanges The keyword orderN HoppingRanges defines the radius of a sphere which is centered on each atom The physically truncated cluster for each atom is constructed by picking up atoms inside the sphere with the radius in the DC and O N Krylov subspace methods 81 e Carbon diamond e Silicon diamond e MnO bulk Ihlice A E Hartree atom 10 0 100 200 300 400 500 10 bcc Fe 1 fcc Al 5 bec Li w LiAl B32 D 10 I LL lt e Small peptide dynorphin A Finite 6 6 carbon
237. tory work as an example Then you have to set the following two keywords Dos fileout and OpticalConductivity fileout as follows Dos fileout on onloff default off OpticalConductivity fileout on onloff default off When the execution is completed normally then you can find files optical and Dos val in the directory work 2 Calculation of optical conductivity Let us make a program code for calculating the optical conductivity Move the directory source and then compile as follows make OpticalConductivityMain When the compile is completed normally then you can find a executable file OpticalConductivity Main in the directory work The optical conductivity can be calculated from the files optical and Dos val using the program OpticalConductivityMain as follows OpticalConductivityMain met optical met Dos val met optout where a methane molecule is considered as an example Then you are interactively asked from the program as follow freqmax 100 000000 gaussian 0 036749 freqmax Hartree 3 freq mech 1000 In the output file met optout the second third and fourth columns correspond to the frequency Hartree and optical conductivity arbitrary unit for up and down spins respectively 122 38 Electric transport calculations 38 1 General Electronic transport properties of molecules nano wires and bulks such as superlattice s
238. tructures can be calculated based on a non equilibrium Green function NEGF method within the collinear and non collinear DFT methods The features and capabilities are listed below e SCF calculation of system with two leads under zero and finite bias voltage e SCF calculation under gate bias voltage Compatible with the LDA U method Spin dependent transmission and current k resolved transmission and current along perpendicular to the current axis Calculation of current voltage curve e Accurate and efficient contour integration scheme Interpolation of the effect by the bias voltage e Quick calculation for periodic systems under zero bias The details of the implementation can be found in Ref 54 First the usage of the functionalities for the collinear case is explained in the following subsections After then the non collinear case will be discussed System we consider In the current implementation of OpenMX Ver 3 7 a system shown in Fig 29 a is treated by the NEGF method The system consists of a central region connected with infinite left and right leads and the two dimensional periodicity spreads over the bc plane Considering the two dimensional periodicity the system can be cast into a one dimensional problem depending on the Bloch wave vector k shown in Fig 29 b Also the Green function of the region C Lo Co Ro is self consistently determined in order to take account of relaxation of electronic structure around
239. ul3 a file cdia Band is converted in a gnuplot format as bandgnui3 cdia Band Then two or three files cdia GNUBAND and cdia BANDDAT cdia BANDDAT2 are generated The file cdia GNUBAND is a script for gnuplot and read the data files cdia BANDDAT1 and cdia BANDDAT2 for the up and down spin states respectively If spin polarized calculations using LSDA CA LSDA PW or GGA PBE is employed in the SCF calculation BANDDAT2 for the down spin state is generated in addition to BANDDAT1 The file cdia GNUBAND is plotted using gnuplot as follows 69 gnuplot cdia GNUBAND Figure 12 shows the band dispersion of carbon diamond generated by the above procedure while the range of y axis was changed in the file cdia GNUBAND It is also noted that the chemical potential is automatically shifted to the origin of energy A problem in drawing of the band dispersion is how to choose a unit cell used in calculating of the band dispersion Often the unit cell used in calculating of the band dispersion is differ ent from that used in the definition of the periodic system In such a case you need to define a unit cell used in calculating of the band dispersion by the keyword Band KPath UnitCell If you define Band KPath UnitCell the reciprocal lattice vectors for the calculation of the band disper sion are calculated by the unit vectors specified in Band KPath UnitC
240. untest For the OpenMP MPI parallel running mpirun np 8 openmx runtest nt 2 In the parallel execution you can specify other options for mpirun Then OpenMX will run with 14 test files and compare calculated results with the reference results which are stored in work input_example The comparison absolute difference in the total energy and force is stored in a file runtest result in the directory work The reference results were calculated using a single processor of a 2 6 GHz Xeon machine If the difference is within last seven digits we may consider that the installation is successful As an example runtest result generated by the automatic running test is shown below 1 input_example Benzene dat Elapsed time s 4 78 diff Utot 0 000000000000 diff Force 0 000000000002 2 input_example C60 dat Elapsed time s 14 96 diff Utot 0 000000000019 diff Force 0 000000000004 3 input _example CO dat Elapsed time s 9 86 diff Utot 0 000000000416 diff Force 0 000000000490 4 input_example Cr2 dat Elapsed time s 10 70 diff Utot 0 000000000000 diff Force 0 000000000044 5 input_example Crys MnO dat Elapsed time s 19 98 diff Utot 0 000000004126 diff Force 0 000000001888 6 input _example GaAs dat Elapsed time s 26 39 diff Utot 0 000000001030 diff Force 0 000000000007 7 input_example Glycine dat Elapsed time s 5 48 diff Utot 0 000000000001 diff Force 0
241. ure in large scale systems 14 4 Restart of geometry optimization If the first trial for geometry optimization does not reach a convergent result one can restart the geometry optimization using an input file dat which is generated at every geometry optimiza tion step for the restart calculation with the final structure In such a case it is better to restart the optimization with the approximate Hessian matrix calculated in the first trial to accelerate the convergence In OpenMX Ver 3 7 the approximate Hessian matrix is also saved every geometry op timization step and is reused when the restart is performed by dat Thus even if the geometry optimization is intermittently repeated by subsequent job submission the number of iterations for the geometry optimization step is the same as that in the single submission The functionality may be useful when users optimize large scale systems using computational systems in common use for which the wall time is set for each job 61 15 Molecular dynamics OpenMX Ver 3 7 supports five molecular dynamics simulations constant energy molecular dynamics NVE constant temperature molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling NVT_VS constant tem perature molecular dynamics by a velocity scaling to be considered independently for every atoms NVT_VS2 constant temperature molecular dynamics by the Nose Hoover method NVT_NH and a multi heat bath molecular dynamics NVT_VS4 15 1 N
242. ut by default as shown in Section Test calculation In addition to the Mulliken charge projected to each atom you can also find a decomposed Mulliken y charge to each orbital in out The result stored in out for a methane molecule is as follows Decomposed Mulliken populations 1 Cc Up spin Down spin Sum Diff multiple s 0 0 598003833 0 598003833 1 196007667 0 000000000 sum over m 0 598003833 0 598003833 1 196007667 0 000000000 sum over m mul 0 598003833 0 598003833 1 196007667 0 000000000 px 0 0 588514081 0 588514081 1 177028163 0 000000000 py 0 0 588703212 0 588703212 1 177406424 0 000000000 pz 0 0 588514081 0 588514081 1 177028162 0 000000000 sum over m 1 765731375 1 765731375 3 531462749 0 000000000 sum over mtmul 1 765731375 1 765731375 3 531462749 0 000000000 2 H Up spin Down spin Sum Diff multiple s 0 0 409066346 0 409066346 0 818132693 0 000000000 sum over m 0 409066346 0 409066346 0 818132693 0 000000000 sum over m mul 0 409066346 0 409066346 0 818132693 0 000000000 3 H Up spin Down spin Sum Diff multiple s 0 0 409065912 0 409065912 0 818131824 0 000000000 sum over m 0 409065912 0 409065912 0 818131824 0 000000000 sum over m mul 0 409065912 0 409065912 0 818131824 0 000000000 As you can see the Mulliken charges are decomposed for all the orbitals There are two kind of sum mations in this decomposition One of summations is sum over m which means a summation over magnetic quantum number
243. ve L Primitive J 5 7 96 L Optimized 154 5f Optimized al 154 6 4 W gol 9 F 7 S 7154 77 1 O 1 L 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 L L 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 L 1 1 E 0 10 20 30 40 50 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 5 64 f C diamond 1 7 68 Si diamond 7 L _ Primitive _ Primitive 5 66 e Optimized 7 70f S Optimized 5 68 J 7 727 J 5 70 1 f f fi fi 0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20 Number of Bases Number of Bases Figure 14 The total energy for a carbon dimer C2 a methane molecule CHy carbon and silicon in the diamond structure a ethane molecule C2H and a hexafluoro ethane molecule C2F6 as a function of the number of primitive and optimized orbitals The total energy and the number of orbitals are defined as those per atom for C2 carbon and silicon in the diamond and as those per molecule for CHy CoHe and CoF e atoms The radial functions of basis orbitals are optimized with a constraint that the radial wave function R is independent of the magnetic quantum number which guarantees the rotational invariance of the total energy However the optimized orbital on all the atoms can be different from eath other e species Basis orbitals in atoms with the same species name that you define in Definition of Atomic Species are optimized as the same orbitals If you want to assign the same orbitals to atoms with al most the same chemical environment and optimize these orbitals thi
244. verlap_NC c Force_HNL c PhiF c TRAN_Set_Value c Force_test c Poisson c truncation c frac2xyz c Poisson_ESM c unit2xyz c Free_Arrays c polB c VH_AtomF c FT_NLP c Pot_NeutralAtom c VNAF c FT_PAD c PrintMemory c Voronoi_Charge c FT_ProductPAD c PrintMemory_Fix c Voronoi_Orbital_Moment c FT_ProExpn_VNA c QuickSort c XC_CA_LSDA c FT_VNA c RadialF c XC_Ceperly_Alder c Fuzzy_Weight c readfile c XC_EX c Gaunt c read_scfout c XC_PBE c Gauss_Legendre c ReLU_inverse c XC_PW92C c Generate_Wannier c RestartFileDFT c xyz2spherical c Generating_MP_Special_Kpt c RF_BesselF c zero_cfrac c Get_Cnt_dOrbitals c rmmpi c zero_fermi c Get_Cnt_Orbitals c rot c Get_dOrbitals c Runtest c In addition the following library packages are linked lapack 188 blas fftw MPICH or LAM omp Copyright of the program package The distribution of this program package follows the practice of the GNU General Public License 59 Moreover the author Taisuke Ozaki possesses the copyright of the original version of this program package We cannot offer any guarantee in your use of this program package However when you report program bugs we will cooperate and work well as much as possible together with you to remove the problems Acknowledgment One of us T O would like to thank many colleagues in JRCAT and RICS AIST for helpful suggestions and comments One of us T O was partly supported by the following national projects SYNAF NEDO 93
245. ylovH order 400 and RMM DIISK mixing scheme were used The input file is MCCN dat in the directory work Figure 20 shows the norm of residual charge density in Fourier space as a function of SCF steps We see that 56 SCF steps is enough to obtain convergent charge density for the system where the computational time was about seven minutes After that the following keywords were set in scf maxIter 1 scf EigenvalueSolver Band scf Kgrid 111 scf restart on MO fileout on num HOMOs 2 num LUMOs MO Nkpoint lt MO kpoint 0 0 0 0 0 0 MO kpoint gt Then we calculated the same system in order to obtain wave functions using 16 CPU cores of a 2 6 GHz Xeon machine where the computational time was about 2 minutes Figure 21 shows isosurface maps of the HOMO and LUMO T point of MCCN calculated by the above procedure Although the difference between the O N method and the conventional diagonalization scheme in the computational time is not significant in this example the procedure will be useful for larger system including more than several thousands atoms 92 10 10 10 Norm of residual charge density in Fourier space 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 SCF steps Figure 20 Norm of residual charge density in Fourier space as a function of SCF steps for a multiply connected carbon nanotube MCCN consisting of 564 carbon atoms The input file is MCCN dat in the directory work 93 Figure 21 Isosurface map of
246. ys 64 1045 1992 and references therein O F Sankey and D J Niklewski Phys Rev B 40 3979 1989 W Yang Phys Rev Lett 66 1438 1991 P Ordejon E Artacho and J M Soler Phys Rev B 53 10441 1996 190 39 40 Al 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5l 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 D R Bowler and M J Gillan Chem Phys Lett 325 475 2000 G Kresse and J Furthmeuller Phys Rev B 54 11169 1996 G P Kerker Phys Rev B 23 3082 1981 T A Arias M C Payne and J D Joannopoulos Phys Rev B 45 1538 1992 D Alfe Comp Phys Commun 118 32 1999 P Csaszar and P Pulay J Mol Struct Theochem 114 31 1984 J Baker J Comput Chem 7 385 1986 A Banerjee N Adams J Simons R Shepard J Phys Chem 89 52 1985 C G Broyden J Inst Math Appl 6 76 1970 R Fletcher Comput J 13 317 1970 D Goldrarb Math Comp 24 23 1970 D F Shanno Math Comp 24 647 1970 P E Blochl O Jepsen and O K Andersen Phys Rev B 49 16223 1994 A D Becke and R M Dickson J Chem Phys 89 2993 1988 A Svane and O Gunnarsson Phys Rev Lett 65 1148 1990 Kino s note J Tersoff and D R Hamann Phys Rev B 31 805 1985 G Henkelman and H Jonsson J Chem Phys 113 9978 2000 T Ozaki K Nishio and H Kino Phys Rev 81 035116 2010
247. yword Definition of Atomic Species and the number after the symbol means that of the first column in the specification of the keyword Atoms SpeciesAndCoordinates These output files C_1 pao and 31 H_2 pao can be an input data for pseudo atomic orbitals as is SCF Order N orderN HoppingRanges The keyword orderN HoppingRanges defines the radius of a sphere which is centered on each atom The physically truncated cluster for each atom is constructed by picking up atoms inside the sphere with the radius in the DC and Krylov subspace O N methods orderN KrylovH order The dimension of the Krylov subspace of Hamiltonian in each truncated cluster is given by the or derN KrylovH order orderN KrylovS order In case of orderN Exact Inverse S off the inverse is approximated by a Krylov subspace method for the inverse where the dimension of the Krylov subspace of overlap matrix in each truncated cluster is given by the keyword orderN KrylovS order The default value is orderN KrylovH order x4 orderN Exact Inverse S In case of orderN Exact Inverse S on the inverse of overlap matrix for each truncated cluster is exactly evaluated Otherwise see the keyword orderN KrylovS order The default is on onloff orderN Recalc Buffer In case of orderN Recalc Buffer on the buffer matrix is recalculated at every SCF step Otherwise the buffer matrix is calculated at the first SCF s
248. zigzag edges can align upward and rightward in the left and right leads respectively b Transmission of electron through the channel region C shown in Fig 34 a 38 9 Examples For user s convenience input files for five examples can be found in work negf_example as follows e Carbon chain under zero bias voltage Step 1 Lead Chain dat Step 2 NEGF Chain dat e Graphene sheet under zero bias voltage Step 1 Lead Graphene dat Step 2 NEGF Graphene dat 137 e 8 zigzag graphene nanoribbon with an antiferromagnetic junction under a finite bias voltage of 0 3 V Step 1 Lead L 8ZGNR dat Lead R 8ZGNR dat Step 2 NEGF 8ZGNR 0 3 dat e 8 zigzag graphene nanoribbon with a non collinear magnetic junction under zero bias Step 1 Lead L 8ZGNR NC dat Lead R 8ZGNR NC dat Step 2 NEGF 8ZGNR NC dat e Gold chain by NEGF coupled with NC DFT under zero bias Step 1 Lead Au Chain NC dat Step 2 NEGF Au Chain NC dat 38 10 Automatic running test of NEGF To check whether the NEGF calculation part is properly installed or not an automatic running test for the NEGF calculation can be performed by For the MPI parallel running mpirun np 16 openmx runtestNEGF For the OpenMP MPI parallel running mpirun np 8 openmx runtestNEGF nt 2 Then OpenMX will run with five test cases including calculations of the steps 1 and 2 and compare calculated results with the reference results which are stored in work negf_example The comparis
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
SETUP AND USER GUIDE - Demon Online Help Centre モバイルバッテリー 取扱説明書 Schermate del CtX 3030 Getriebebau NORD 100 % COMPATIBLE Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file